Mazda B2300 Truck Owners Manual No Job Name
Mazda-2006-Mazda-B2300-Truck-Owners-Manual-817760 mazda-2006-mazda-b2300-truck-owners-manual-817760
Mazda-4Wd-Users-Manual-371578 mazda-4wd-users-manual-371578
4WD to the manual ce215ff5-edae-d3a4-6568-9aef70791042
2015-06-15
: Mazda Mazda-B2300-Truck-Owners-Manual-747174 mazda-b2300-truck-owners-manual-747174 mazda pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 268 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 6 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 12
Warning and control lights 12
Gauges 16
Entertainment Systems 19
AM/FM stereo 19
AM/FM Stereo single CD/MP3 system 21
AM/FM Stereo cassette, CD/MP3 sound system 24
In-dash CD6/MP3 disc Premium Pioneer audio system 28
Climate Controls 33
Heater only 33
Manual heating and air conditioning 34
Lights 36
Headlamps 36
Turn signal control 39
Bulb replacement 40
Driver Controls 47
Windshield wiper/washer control 47
Steering wheel adjustment 47
Power windows 49
Mirrors 50
Speed control 50
Locks and Security 56
Keys 56
Locks 56
Anti-theft system 60
Seating and Safety Restraints 63
Seating 63
Safety restraints 65
Table of Contents
1
PAGE: 1OP: root EDIT SESSION: 6DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 2 SESS: 8 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Airbags 77
Child restraints 89
Tires, Wheels and Loading 105
Tire Information 108
Tire Inflation 109
Vehicle loading 122
Trailer towing 129
Recreational towing 139
Driving 141
Starting 141
Brakes 145
Transmission operation 149
Roadside Emergencies 162
Hazard flasher switch 162
Fuel pump shut-off switch 162
Fuses and relays 163
Changing tires 173
Lug Nut Torque 181
Overheating 182
Jump starting 183
Wrecker towing 188
Customer Assistance 189
Cleaning 202
Maintenance and Specifications 208
Engine compartment 218
Engine oil 222
Battery 228
Engine Coolant 230
Fuel information 236
Refill capacities 253
Lubricant specifications 256
Engine data 257
Table of Contents
2
PAGE: 2OP: root EDIT SESSION: 8DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 10 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Accessories 262
Index 263
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and
without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2005 MNAO
Table of Contents
3
PAGE: 3OP: root EDIT SESSION: 10 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the
time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook.
The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following
website:
•In the United States: www.mazdausa.com
•In Canada: www.mazda.ca
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off
switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine.
The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
CIMS #517043
com_calif-warning
itdseq=1
CIMS #869811
com_preface.mazda
itdseq=2
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 4OP: root EDIT SESSION: 12 DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Introduction
4
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of
personal injury to yourself or
others? In this guide, answers to
such questions are contained in
comments highlighted by a bold
WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing
of automotive fluids.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is
necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition,
your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance
Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not
covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with
your Owner’s Guide.
CIMS #729502
com_environ-info itdseq=3
CIMS #958891
com_handbook-warn.mazda
itdseq=4
CIMS #958892
com_warns-on-vehicle.mazda
itdseq=5
CIMS #1123266
com_environ-protect.mazda
itdseq=6
CIMS #689351
com_breaking_veh.j14
itdseq=7
CIMS #729514
com_special-note-title
itdseq=8
CIMS #689352
com_emission-warning.j14
itdseq=9
art=expii001_b
art=ctoss542_a
art=expii002_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 5OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Introduction
5
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 6 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Event Data Recorder
The computer in your vehicle is capable of recording detailed data
potentially including but not limited to information such as:
•the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and
passengers,
•information about the performance of various systems and modules in
the vehicle, and
•information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system
status potentially including information related to how the driver
operates the vehicle including but not limited to vehicle speed.
This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or
near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by:
•service and repair facilities.
•law enforcement or government agencies.
•the Manufacturer and Distributor.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the section Supplemental restraint
system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
CIMS #1138947
com_edr-warning.mazda
itdseq=10
CIMS #1066766
com_elec-cntrls.non-euro
itdseq=11
CIMS #80196
com_utility-notice
itdseq=12
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 6OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Introduction
6
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 7 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package.
CIMS #1319986
com_snowplowing.mazda
itdseq=13
CIMS #1123276
com_using-ambulance.mazda
itdseq=14
CIMS #1063876
com_wcr-symbols.mbs
itdseq=15
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 7OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Introduction
7
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 8 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide
Protecting the
Environment Fasten Safety Belt
Airbag - Front Airbag - Side
Child Seat Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist Power Windows
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 8OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Introduction
8
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 9 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout Personal Alarm System
Feature
Engine Oil Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature Do Not Open When Hot
Battery Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid Explosive Gas
Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN Emission System
Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack Check fuel cap
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE
The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.
Mazda may change the contents without notice.
CIMS #604091
com_info_guide.j14
itdseq=16
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 9OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Introduction
9
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 10 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Headlamp control
(pg. 36)
Instrument panel dimmer
control
(pg. 37)
Instrument cluster
(pg. 12)
Speed control*
(pg. 50)
Hood release
(pg. 217)
Driver air bag
(pg. 77)
Parking brake release
(pg. 147)
Turn signal and
wiper/washer control
(pg. 47)
* If equipped
CIMS #1282361
mbs_ipanelleft.fus
itdseq=17
art=mbsip1_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 10 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
10
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 11 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4wd control*
(pg. 156)
Audio system
(pg. 19) Auxiliary power point*
(pg. 48)
Fog lamp control*
(pg. 37)
Climate control system
(pg. 33)
Passenger air bag
deactivate switch
(pg. 84)
Cigar lighter*
(pg. 49)
* if equipped
CIMS #953683
mbs_ipanelright.fus
itdseq=18
art=mbsip2_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 11 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
11
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 12 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning light for additional information.
Check engine: The Check Engine
indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the ON
position to check the bulb. Solid
illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components,
possibly causing a fire.
CIMS #1264223
com_warn-lights.mbs04
itdseq=19
art=mbsis302_b
art=expis315_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 12 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
12
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 13 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when
the fuel cap may not be properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap if
this light remains on. Continued
driving with this light on may cause
the Check Engine warning light to
come on.
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an
improperly installed or properly re-installed fuel filler cap
depending on driving and fuel tank level conditions. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a
failure to brake proportioning and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by checked by your
authorized dealer.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected; have the system
serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake
warning light also is illuminated.
P!
BRAKE
ABS
art=dnois308_a
art=dnogf004_a
art=dnogf001_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 13 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
13
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 14 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Airbag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately by your authorized
dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental
restraint system has been detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. Refer to the Seating
and safety restraints chapter.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates
when the oil pressure falls below the
normal range, refer to Engine oil in
the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter.
Engine coolant temperature:
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is high. Stop the
vehicle as soon as possible , switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
art=ranis319_a
art=exdis014_a
art=expis017_a
art=dnois006_a
art=f12ip034_a
art=dnois002_a
art=cgris311_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 14 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
14
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 15 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Overdrive off (if equipped):
Illuminates when the overdrive
function of the transmission has
been turned off, refer to the
Driving chapter. If the light does not come on or the light flashes
steadily, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage
to the transmission could occur.
Four wheel drive low (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is engaged.
NOTE: If the light continues to
flash have the system serviced.
Four wheel drive high (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive high is engaged. It
may also illuminate when the 4WD LOW is engaged, refer to the Driving
chapter for more information.
NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced.
Anti-theft system: Flashes when
the SecurilockyPassive Anti-theft
System has been activated.
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is engaged. Turns
off when the speed control system
is disengaged.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
O/D
OFF
4x4
LOW
4x4
art=expis024_a
art=expis340_a
art=f12ip031_a
art=ranis348_a
art=dewis310_a
art=exdis005_a
art=expis021_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 15 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
15
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 16 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Door ajar warning chime: Sounds when any door is opened (or not
fully closed).
GAUGES
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications
chapter.
CIMS #1264222
com_gauges.mbs04
itdseq=20
art=mbsis304_b
art=ranis341_a
art=ranis343_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 16 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
16
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 17 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap and/or the
radiator cap while the engine is running or hot, this may result
in serious burns.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press the button once until “TRIP”
appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). To reset
the trip, press and hold the control
again for approximately 2 seconds,
until the trip reading is 0.0 miles (kilometers). To toggle between trip
and odometer, press and release the control.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
Proper gauge indication requires the
ignition to be in the OFF or
ACCESSORY position during refueling, otherwise correct fuel indication
after refueling can be slow to update. Also, a minimum of 3 gallons is
needed for correct indication after refueling.
NOTE: The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
art=ranis345_b
art=ranis346_b
art=ranis344_a
art=ranis342_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 17 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
17
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 18 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 18 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Instrument Cluster
18
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 19 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
AUDIO SYSTEMS
AM/FM stereo (if equipped)
Your radio is equipped with a special display feature. This allows you to
select what will appear in the display. You may select Clock mode, which
displays the time, or Frequency mode, which displays the current radio
frequency. If clock mode is selected and a radio function is pressed (i.e,
SEEK, TUNE, Memory Presets), the radio information will display
momentarily and then again display the time.
1. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.
2. CLK —To set the time:
Ensure that your audio system
is turned off. Press and hold
CLK until the hours flash in the
display. Press AUDIO to adjust the hours.
Press and hold CLK again until the minutes flash. Press
AUDIO to adjust the minutes.
To set the display mode: Press repeatedly to toggle between Clock
mode and frequency mode.
CIMS #1486771
com_audio-title.06
itdseq=21
CIMS #1239876
com_pionamfm.ran
itdseq=22
art=rancf807_b
art=rancf831_a
art=rancf832_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 19 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
19
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 20 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. AUDIO: Press AUDIO
repeatedly to toggle through the
following modes and use
/ to make adjustments in those modes.
Bass: Press AUDIO to decrease/increase the bass setting.
Treble: Press AUDIO to decrease/increase the treble setting.
Balance: Press AUDIO to adjust the audio between the left and
right speakers.
Hours: Press AUDIO to decrease/increase the hours.
Minute: Press AUDIO to decrease/increase the minutes.
4. Tune: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio
frequency and in audio mode to select various settings.
5. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To tune a preset
station, press the desired memory preset.
6. SEEK: Press SEEK to
access the previous or next
radio station. If pressed for less
than .5 seconds, the system will seek to the next or previous station.
7. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to
turn the system ON/OFF. Turn
to adjust the volume levels.
If the volume is set above a
certain level, and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back
on.
art=rancf830_a
art=221cf840_a
art=221cf837_a
art=221cf841_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 20 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
20
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 21 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
AM/FM stereo single CD/MP3 system
1. CD eject: Press to eject the
CD.
2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. Press
MENU to adjust the
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is
off.
3. MUTE: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to
return to the playing media.
4. MENU: Press MENU
repeatedly to toggle through the
following modes and use
/ to make adjustment in those modes.
CIMS #1296341
com_scdpio.mbs04
itdseq=23
art=rancf806_c
art=rancf827_b
art=rancf833_a
art=rancf834_a
art=rancf838_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 21 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
21
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 22 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Autoset: Press MENU to
set the strongest local radio stations
for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing
your original manually set preset
stations.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Bass: Press MENU to decrease/increase the bass setting.
Treble: Press MENU to decrease/increase the treble setting.
Balance: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the left and
right speakers.
Fade: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the front and
rear speakers.
5. TUNE : Press to manually go
down/up ( / ) the radio
frequency and also to select
various settings in menu mode.
6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to
play the tracks on the current
CD in random order.
7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD track.
8. FF (Fast forward): Press to
manually advance in a CD track.
9. REW (Rewind): Press to
manually reverse in a CD track.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously
set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly.
11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access the next/previous strong station. In
CD mode, press to advance to the next/previous track.
REW
1
art=rancf835_a
art=rancf835_a
art=rancf845_a
art=221cf806_a
art=221cf805_a
art=rancf828_b
art=rancf839_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 22 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
22
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 23 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
12. SCAN: Press to toggle between
SCAN ON and SCAN OFF. When
activated, the system scans up
through and plays a brief sampling of available radio stations or CD
tracks. Press again to stop.
13. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
14. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to
turn ON/OFF. Turn to
increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is
turned back on.
15. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already present in the
system, the disc will begin to
play.
16. CD slot: Insert a CD label side
up.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
art=221cf812_a
art=rancf842_a
art=221cf819_a
art=rancf837_a
art=221cf823_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 23 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
23
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 24 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
AM/FM stereo cassette, CD/MP3 sound system
1. CD eject: Press to eject the
CD.
2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. Press
MENU to adjust the
hours/minutes.
Press CLK to display the time of day when the ignition is off.
3. MUTE: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to
return to the playing media.
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to toggle through the following
modes and use / to make
adjustment in those modes.
CIMS #1296342
com_dmpio.mbs04
itdseq=24
art=rancf805_c
art=rancf827_b
art=rancf833_a
art=rancf834_a
art=rancf838_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 24 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
24
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 25 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Autoset: Press MENU to access the
autoset setting. Allows you to set
the strongest local radio stations
without losing your original
manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Use MENU to
set.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press again to disengage.
Bass: Press MENU to decrease/increase the level of bass.
Treble: Press MENU to decrease/increase the level of treble.
Balance: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the left and
right speakers.
Fade: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the front and
rear speakers.
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU to go to
the previous or next MP3 directory.
Flat file/directory mode: Press MENU to select Flat file mode
or Directory mode.
Track number/music name/file name: In MP3 mode, press
MENU to view by track number, music name or file name.
Dolby: Dolbytnoise reduction: Reduces tape noise and hiss.
Press MENU to cycle Dolby ON/OFF. The Dolbytnoise
reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. Dolbytand the double-D symbol are registered
trademarks of DolbytLaboratories Licensing Corporation.
5. TUNE: Press to manually go
down/up ( / ) the radio
frequency and also to select
various settings in menu mode.
6. Tape eject: Press to eject the
tape.
art=rancf835_a
art=rancf835_a
art=rancf827_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 25 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
25
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 26 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
7. Tape 1–2: Press to change
playing sides of the tape.
8. TEXT: In MP3 mode, press to
view the next 12 characters in
the MP3 Music name/file name
of the current MP3 track and directory.
9. SHUFF (Shuffle): In CD or
MP3 mode, press to play the
tracks on the current CD/MP3
in random order. In MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks
within the current directory in random order.
10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track.
11. FF (Fast forward): In tape
mode, press to fast forward the
tape. In CD mode, press to
manually advance in a CD track.
12. REW (Rewind): In tape mode,
press to rewind the tape. In CD
mode, press to manually reverse
in a CD track.
13. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset
station, press the desired memory preset button.
14. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
15. SEEK/TRACK: In radio mode, press / to access the
next/previous strong station. In CD and MP3 flat file mode, press to
access the next track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the
next/previous track in the current directory.
16. Scan: In radio mode, scan
through the available stations.
In tape mode, you may set
SCAN on or off. If activated, the player will scan the tape and plays a
REW
1
art=221cf826_b
art=221cf809_a
art=rancf845_a
art=221cf806_a
art=221cf805_a
art=rancf828_b
art=rancf824_a
art=rancf825_a
art=221cf812_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 26 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
26
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 27 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
short Introduction of each song. In CD and MP3 flat file mode, you
may set the scan on or off. If activated, the system will scan through
each track. In MP3 directory mode, you may set scan on or off. If
activated, the system will scan in the current directory.
17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to
increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is
turned back on.
18. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already in the system,
the disc will begin play.
19. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side
up.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
20. Cassette slot: Insert a cassette, facing to the right.
art=221cf819_a
art=rancf837_a
art=221cf823_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 27 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
27
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 28 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Premium in-dash CD6/MP3 disc audio system
1. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.
2. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If
a CD is already in the system,
the disc will start playing.
3. EJ (CD eject): To eject an
individual CD, press CD and
select the correct slot number
by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press and hold EJ to eject
all loaded CDs.
4. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. Press
MENU to adjust the
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is
off.
CIMS #1273156
com_premcd.mbs
itdseq=25
art=rancf844_a
art=rancf825_a
art=rancf837_a
art=rancf827_b
art=rancf833_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 28 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
28
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 29 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
5. MUTE: Press to mute the
playing media. Press again to
return to the playing media.
6. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly
to toggle through the following
modes and use / to make
adjustment in those modes.
Autoset: Allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations
without losing your original
manually set preset stations for
AM/FM1/FM2 . Press MENU to access. Use MENU to set.
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system
will store the last one in the remaining presets.
Bass: Press MENU to decrease/increase the bass setting.
Treble: Press MENU to decrease/increase the treble setting.
Balance: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the left and
right speakers.
Fade: Press MENU to adjust the audio between the front and
rear speakers.
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU / to go to
the previous/next directory.
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this
feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.
Track #/normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and
use / to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music
name or file name).
7. TUNE/DISC: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio
frequency, select the previous/next CD or to select various settings
in menu mode. In MP3 directory mode, press / to access the
previous/next directory
8. TEXT: In MP3 normal music name/file name mode, press to view the
next 12 characters in the MP3 music name/filename of the current
MP3 track and directory.
art=rancf834_a
art=rancf838_a
art=rancf846_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 29 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
29
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 30 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
9. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to
play the tracks on the current
CD/MP3 in random order. In
MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current
directory in random order.
10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the
current CD/MP3 track.
11. FF (Fast forward): Press to
manually advance in a CD track.
12. REW (Rewind): Press to
manually reverse in a CD track.
13. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset
station, press the desired memory preset.
14. SEEK/TRACK: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press /
to access the next/previous strong station or track. In MP3 directory
mode, press to select the next/previous track in the current
directory.
15. SCAN: In radio, CD and MP3
flat file mode, press for a brief
sampling of radio stations or
CD/MP3 tracks. In MP3 directory mode, press to hear a brief
sampling of all tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.
16. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF. Turn to
increase/decrease volume.
If the volume is set above a
certain level and the ignition is
turned off, the volume will come
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is
turned back on.
17. LOAD: To load a CD/MP3 disc to a specific slot, press LOAD and
select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press
and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.
REW
1
art=rancf845_a
art=221cf806_a
art=221cf805_a
art=rancf828_b
art=rancf840_a
art=221cf812_a
art=221cf841_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 30 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
30
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 31 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
18. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio frequencies: AM and FM frequencies are established by the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors: There are three factors that can affect radio
reception:
•Distance/strength: The further you travel from a station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
•Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
•Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
Cassette/player care:
Do:
•Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
•Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
•Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
•Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
•Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
CIMS #1010866
com_207cares.fly
itdseq=26
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 31 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
31
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 32 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Don’t:
•Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
•Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
CD/CD player care:
Do:
•Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
•Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
•Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
•Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
•Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Dirty, warped
or damaged CDs, irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch
protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further
information.
Audio system warranty and service: Refer to the Warranty Guide
for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your
authorized Mazda dealership.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 32 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Entertainment Systems
32
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 33 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment:
Controls the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
:Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
:Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
:Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
:Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
floor vents.
:Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.
Operating tips
•To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
•To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the rear seats.
•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select .
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
CIMS #1064356
com_heatran.fly itdseq=27
CIMS #1052492
com_htonlytips.fly
itdseq=28
art=rancf780_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 33 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Climate Controls
33
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 34 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment:
Controls the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle.
2. Temperature selection:
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Recirculated air flows
from the instrument panel vents only. Temperature of air is not
adjustable (cold only).
A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Outside air flows from the
instrument panel vents only.
:Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents only.
(A/C compressor is off).
OFF: Outside air is shut off and the fan motor does not operate.
:Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON).
:Distributes outside air through the floor vents. (A/C compressor is
off).
:Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
the floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON).
:Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents only.
(A/C compressor is ON).
Operating tips
•To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the position.
•To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF position.
CIMS #1284326
com_man-ac-mbs.fly
itdseq=29
CIMS #1284327
com_op-tipfly.mbs
itdseq=30
art=rancf781_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 34 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Climate Controls
34
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 35 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.
•Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
•Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select .
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 35 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Climate Controls
35
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 36 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking
lamps, instrument panel lamps,
license plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
High beams
After turning the headlamps on,
push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
•the ignition must be in the ON position and
OFF
CIMS #222826
com_headlamp_title
itdseq=31
CIMS #54756
com_headlamp_control
itdseq=32
CIMS #1124037
com_brights.mazda
itdseq=33
CIMS #54762
com_flash_to_pass
itdseq=34
CIMS #222828
com_drl_title_ie itdseq=35
CIMS #1124036
com_daytime_lamps.mazda
itdseq=36
art=rancf504_a
art=rancf322_a
art=rancf323_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 36 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
36
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 37 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp.
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the parking lights or side
marker lights and generally may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps
under these conditions may result in a collision.
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The foglamps can be turned on
when the ignition is in the ON
position and the headlamp control is
in either of the following positions:
•Parking lamps
•Low beams
Press the foglamp control to activate the foglamps.
Press the foglamp control again to deactivate the foglamps.
When the highbeams are activated, the foglamps will not operate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control up or down to
adjust the intensity of the panel
lighting.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the interior lamps.
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the
assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have
problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by
a qualified service technician.
Headlamp aim adjustment
The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be
aimed visually by doing the following:
DIM
CIMS #83532 com_fog-title.ie
itdseq=37
CIMS #528621
com_foglamps.05
itdseq=38
CIMS #222830
com_panel_dimmer_title
itdseq=39
CIMS #1048941
com_panel_dimmer2.ran
itdseq=40
CIMS #975083
com_aim-lites.info.fly
itdseq=41
CIMS #1437296
com_vert_aim.mbs
itdseq=42
art=unocf507_a
art=rancf505_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 37 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
37
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 38 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam
pattern.
•(1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(2) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(4) Horizontal reference line
•(5) Center of headlamps
•(6) Center line of the vehicle
2. The center of the headlamp is
marked either on the lens (a
circle or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp
(mark or feature). Measure the height from the center of your
headlamp to the ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long
horizontal line on the wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam
headlamps and open the hood.
4. Locate the high intensity area of
the beam pattern and place the
top edge of the intensity zone
even with the horizontal
reference line (4). If the top
edge of the high intensity area
is not even with the horizontal
line, follow the next step to
adjust it.
art=ranmc313_a
art=ranmc314_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 38 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
38
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 39 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
5. Locate the vertical adjuster for
each headlamp. Adjust the aim
by usinga4mmwrench to turn
the adjuster control either
clockwise (to adjust down) or
counterclockwise (to adjust up).
6. In addition to the horizontal line
marked in step 2, a pair of
vertical lines (5) must be
marked at the center line of the
headlamps on the wall or
screen.
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with
the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If
the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical
line, follow the next step to adjust it.
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster
for each headlamp. Usea4mm
wrench, turning it clockwise or
counterclockwise, to place the
left edge of the high intensity
area even with the vertical line
corresponding to the headlamp
under adjustment.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
•Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
•Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
CIMS #54764
com_turn_indicator
itdseq=43
art=mbscf406_a
art=mbscf407_a
art=rancf324_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 39 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
39
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 40 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
INTERIOR LAMPS
Courtesy/reading lamps (if equipped)
The courtesy lamp lights when:
•any door is opened.
•the instrument panel dimmer
switch is held up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
•the remote entry controls are
pressed and the ignition is OFF.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp Condensation
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility.
NOTE: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Park/turn/side marker
lamps (front)
23457 AK (amber)
Headlamps 2 9007
Fog lamps (if
equipped)
29006
Hi-mount brake lamp 1 922
CIMS #54745 com_interior.02
itdseq=44
CIMS #628962
com_courtesy_lamps.ran
itdseq=45
CIMS #80513
com_ext_bulbs.02
itdseq=46
CIMS #1462914
com_condensation
itdseq=47
CIMS #600056
com_check-bulbs.j14
itdseq=48
CIMS #684809
com_bulb_chart.mbs
itdseq=49
art=rancf308_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 40 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
40
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 41 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Rear stop/tail lamps 2 4157K or 3157K
Rear turn lamps 2 3156
Rear license plate
lamps
2194
Backup lamps 2 3156
Dome lamp 1 912
Map/dome-SuperCab
(if equipped)
2904
Map/dome-Regular
Cab (if equipped)
1 904
1 904
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently:
•interior overhead lamp
•map lamp
For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
NOTE: The procedure can be difficult. Your Mazda dealer has the proper
tools, training and parts to perform this task. If you have difficulty with
this, visit your local Mazda dealer.
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.
Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a
halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.
CIMS #600057
com_interior_bulbs.j14
itdseq=50
CIMS #684808
com_headlamps.mbs
itdseq=51
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 41 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
41
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 42 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
To remove the headlamp bulb:
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.
2. Reach behind the lamp assembly for access and disconnect the
electrical connector.
3. Locate the bulb retaining ring
behind the headlamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring
by turning it counterclockwise
and remove the old bulb by
gently pulling it straight back
out of the lamp assembly. Keep
the retaining ring to retain the
new bulb.
To install the new bulb:
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hands could cause the bulb
to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Always wear
safety glasses while handling bulbs.
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the
glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn
the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the
tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the
bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear
of the lamp assembly.
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts
the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.”
art=mbscf404_a
art=mbscf400_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 42 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
42
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 43 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps,
locking it into position.
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you
should not need to align it again.
Replacing front park/turn side marker bulbs
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in
OFF position, then open the
hood.
2. Remove the screw from lamp
assembly.
3. Disengage lamp assembly by
pulling it straight forward. It has
a snap fit.
4. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove
from lamp assembly.
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out
of socket and push in the new
bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket in lamp
assembly by turning clockwise.
7. Align the lamp on the vehicle
and push to snap in place.
art=mbscf405_a
art=mbscf408_a
art=dnomc306_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 43 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
43
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 44 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
8. Install the screw on lamp assembly.
Replacing stop lamp/tail lamp/sidemarker lamp/turn lamp/backup
lamp bulbs
These bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly,
one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Open the tailgate to expose the
lamp assemblies.
2. Remove the four screws and the
lamp assembly from vehicle.
3. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove
from lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in lamp
assembly by turning clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and
secure with four screws.
art=mbscf401_a
art=mbscf409_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 44 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
44
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 45 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Replacing fog lamp bulbs
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.
Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a
halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
1. Remove the bulb socket from
the fog lamp by turning
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp
bulb.
3. Connect the electrical connector to the new fog lamp bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in the fog lamp turning clockwise.
Replacing high-mount brake lamp
To remove the brake lamp assembly:
1. Remove the two screws and
lamp assembly from vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb socket from
lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise.
3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.
To install the brake lamp assembly:
1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise.
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.
art=ranmc306_a
art=ranmc312_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 45 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
45
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 46 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located
behind the rear bumper. To change
the license plate lamp bulbs:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper
to locate the bulb socket.
2. Twist the socket
counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull out the old bulb from
socket and push in the new
bulb.
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
art=exdmc038_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 46 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Lights
46
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 47 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers
(from desired interval to low or high
speed position); rotate towards you
to decrease the speed of the wipers.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
•briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
•a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•a long push and hold: the wipers
and washer fluid will be activated
for up to ten seconds.
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock
the steering wheel in position.
CIMS #992737
com_multi-lever.ran
itdseq=52
CIMS #1445671
com_tilt-steering-mbs
itdseq=53
art=rancf325_a
art=rancf326_a
art=207cf323_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 47 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
47
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 48 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver
to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of
control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving.
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
variety of console features. These
include:
•Utility compartment with
cassette/compact disc storage
•Cupholders
•Coin holder slots
•Flip up armrest
•Passenger airbag on/off switch (if
equipped)
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.
CIMS #101591 com_center.ie
itdseq=54
CIMS #101830 com_center.09
itdseq=55
CIMS #75589
com_powerpoint
itdseq=56
CIMS #81461
com_powerpoint.04
itdseq=57
art=rancf520_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 48 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
48
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 49 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
The auxiliary power points are
located on the instrument panel.
Do not use the power point for
operating the cigarette lighter
element (if equipped).
To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the power
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of
12 VDC/180W. Refer to Passenger
Compartment Fuse Panel in the
Roadside Emergencies chapter for fuse ratings in your vehicle.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter
socket.
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from
its heating position when it is ready to be used.
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
CIMS #993361
com_pwr-window.f12
itdseq=58
art=rancf517_d
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 49 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
49
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 50 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
AUTO and release quickly. Press
again to stop.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power mirror control (if equipped)
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select to adjust the left
mirror or to adjust the right
mirror.
2. Move the control in the
direction you wish to tilt the
mirror.
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
CIMS #959854
com_auto-dwn-window
itdseq=59
CIMS #764576
com_mirror-title itdseq=60
CIMS #689332
com_pwrmirr-title.maz.ie
itdseq=61
CIMS #76084
com_power-mirrors.arrows
itdseq=62
CIMS #959877
com_foldaway.fly
itdseq=63
CIMS #1122037
com_speed-cntrl.mbs
itdseq=64
art=rancf518_b
art=rancf519_b
art=207cf015_a
art=unocf342_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 50 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
50
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 51 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. You may lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING: Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral)
with the speed control on. You may lose control of the vehicle
or cause engine system damage.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and
release it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET + control and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
5. The indicator light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
•Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
•If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
•If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
•If the vehicle speed decreases to 30 mph (48 km/h) or less, your
speed control will disengage
Disengaging speed control
To disengage the speed control:
•Depress the brake pedal or
•Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped).
CIMS #1264224
com_use-spd-cntrl.mbs04
itdseq=65
art=rancf328_a
art=rancf331_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 51 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
51
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 52 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES (resume) control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RES control will not
work if the vehicle speed is not
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are three ways to set a higher
speed:
•Press and hold the SET + control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
•Press and release the SET +
control to operate the Tap-Up function. Each tap will increase the set
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
•Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are three ways to reduce a
set speed:
•Press and hold the CST - control
until you get to the desired
speed, then release the control.
•Press and release the CST -
control to operate the Tap-Down
function. Each tap will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
art=rancf330_a
art=rancf331_a
art=rancf332_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 52 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
52
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 53 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Depress the brake pedal or the
clutch pedal (if equipped) until
the desired vehicle speed is
reached, press the SET + control.
Turning off speed control
There are three ways to turn off the speed control:
•Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.
•Press the speed control OFF
control.
•Turn OFF the ignition.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
Note: Fully depressing the clutch
pedal may cause a flare in engine RPM as the throttle is returned to idle.
This is normal.
OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Activating overdrive
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through
all available gears.
Deactivating overdrive
Press the Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) located on the end of
the gearshift lever. The O/D Off
indicator light will illuminate on the
instrument cluster. The transmission
will operate in all gears except overdrive.
To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control
Switch again. The O/D Off indicator light will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will
automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode.
O/D
ON/OFF
CIMS #197226
com_overdrive.title-ie
itdseq=66
CIMS #111943
com_overdrive-activate
itdseq=67
CIMS #713261
com_overdrive-deativate.mbs
itdseq=68
art=rancf331_a
art=rancf329_a
art=rangf110_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 53 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
53
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 54 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission
Operation section of the Driving chapter.
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend
the pickup box for longer loads.
To extend the bed extender:
1. Lower tailgate.
2. Pull the round knobs on each
side of the extender to release
it from the pickup box.
3. Pivot extender on to the
tailgate.
4. Evenly push down on the
extender and push the round
knobs in on each side locking it
in place.
Green markings on the shaft
indicate the locked position. The
locking clip screws below the middle
bar can be tightened
counterclockwise for extra security.
Note: If the red marking on the
shaft is visible, the bed extender is not locked or properly
secured.
To stow the bed extender, follow Steps 1 through 4 in reverse order.
The bed extender may be used to secure a load of up to 100 lb. (46 kg)
on the tailgate.
The bed extender should always be kept in the stowed position
with the tailgate closed when not in use.
When driving the vehicle off road, the bed extender should be in
the stowed position and the tailgate closed.
CIMS #506831
com_bed-extender.225
itdseq=69
art=207cf332_a
art=221cf339_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 54 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
54
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 55 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
To remove the bed extender:
1. Extend the bed extender.
2. Pull the round knobs on each
side of the extender to unlock
it.
Make sure the locking clip screws
are loose before removing the
extender.
3. Press the locking clips below
the middle bar on each side and
lift the extender out of the bed.
Note: Remove and store the bed extender when not in use.
To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse
order.
art=221cf338_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 55 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driver Controls
55
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 56 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the top of the control to
unlock all doors and the bottom to
lock all doors.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
•weather conditions,
•nearby radio towers,
•structures around the vehicle, or
•other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
UNLOCK
LOCK
CIMS #977601 com_keys.vil
itdseq=70
CIMS #83545
com_powerdoor-title.ie
itdseq=71
CIMS #101856
com_power-doors.03
itdseq=72
CIMS #1392205
com_remote-title-ie.fly
itdseq=73
CIMS #1031085
com_rem-entry.fly-panic
itdseq=74
art=rancf508_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 56 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
56
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 57 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
•lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
•activate the personal alarm.
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps will illuminate.
2. Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the
doors.
Locking the doors
•Press and release to lock all the doors. The park lamps will flash
once to confirm lock; if any of the doors are not properly closed, the
lamps will not flash.
•If is pressed a second time within three seconds, the lamps will
flash again and the horn will chirp to confirm all doors are locked and
closed. If either door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will
chirp twice.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps
will flash for approximately 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to
the 4 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3
minutes.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1
(ACCESSORY), 2 (LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
CIMS #1090284
com_unlock.fly-ran
itdseq=75
CIMS #1090285
com_lock.fly-ran itdseq=76
CIMS #1513131
com_panic.fly-ran
itdseq=77
CIMS #998940
com_battery-remote.fly
itdseq=78
art=navcf305_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 57 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
57
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 58 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the
two halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring.
DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER
COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD
OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF
THE REMOTE ENTRY
TRANSMITTER.
2. Do not wipe off any grease on
the battery terminals on the
back surface of the circuit
board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure.
CIMS #999031
com_lost-remote.fly
itdseq=79
art=dewcf305_b
art=f23mc007_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 58 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
58
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 59 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 2
(LOCK) position to 3 (OFF).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the 3
(OFF) position and 4 (ON).
Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start
the procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
•the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or
•the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
•they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
•any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps after several minutes if
they are left on accidentally.
3
2
1
5
4
CIMS #1258992
com_illuminate.fly-ran
itdseq=80
art=f12dr029_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 59 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
59
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 60 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
SECURILOCKYPASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
SecuriLockypassive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to
program the coded key.
Note: The SecuriLockypassive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Anti-theft indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in
the instrument cluster.
•When the ignition is in the 2 (LOCK) position, the indicator will flash
once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLockysystem is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
•When the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLockysystem, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will
need to be programmed.
CIMS #1090876
com_securi-title-ie.fly
itdseq=81
CIMS #1514796
com_theft-indic.mbs
itdseq=82
CIMS #999040
com_coded-key-replace.fly
itdseq=83
art=ranis348_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 60 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
60
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 61 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and
understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Tips:
•A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
•Only use Securilockykeys.
•You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
•If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
1. Insert a previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 3
(OFF) position to the 4 (ON)
position. Keep the ignition in
the 4 (ON) position for at least
one second, but no more than
10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF)
position, and remove the coded
key from the ignition.
4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the
ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but
not more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second
key from the ignition.
7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed
coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the
ignition.
3
2
1
5
4
CIMS #999041
com_keyless-program.fly
itdseq=84
art=207cf313_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 61 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
61
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 62 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second.
9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start
your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off
rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to
have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure
from Step 1 for each additional key.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 62 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Locks and Security
62
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 63 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
SEATING
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicle is moving.
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Sitting in a
reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you cannot get the full protection from seat belts.
During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the
lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum
protection, sit well back and upright. The lap portion of the
seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly
and as low as possible.
Lift the release bar to move seat
forward or backward. Ensure that
the seat is locked into place.
Pull lever located at the side of the
seat cushion up to adjust seatback.
CIMS #1072391
com_seats.231nad
itdseq=85
CIMS #1292966
com_front-seat.mbs
itdseq=86
art=ranss579_a
art=ranss580_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 63 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
63
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 64 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
60/40 seat (if equipped)
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest (if
equipped), lift the latch to open lid.
The 60/40 seat cupholder (if
equipped) is detachable for
cleaning.
•Firmly grasp the bottom of the
cup holder and pull up.
To re-attach:
•Slide the cupholder over the two pins located on the front of the 60%
driver’s seat.
•Press down until it is firmly latched into place.
Using the manual lumbar support (if equipped)
Turn the lumbar support control
clockwise to increase firmness.
Turn the lumbar support control
counterclockwise to increase
softness.
Passenger side rear access (if equipped)
Pull up on the recliner handle. The
seat will lean forward. Lift the
release bar to move the seat forward
to access the rear area of the cab.
CIMS #442288
com_manual_lumbar-title.ie
itdseq=87
CIMS #75592
com_manual_seat_adjust.01
itdseq=88
CIMS #1264846
com_rear-access.mbs
itdseq=89
art=ranss582_a
art=navss509_a
art=ranss572_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 64 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
64
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 65 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
To return seat to original position, slide the seat bottom back, then push
the seatback up to lock it in place. The seat will lock, and you will have
to use the release bar to move the seat back to the original position.
REAR SEATS
Center facing jump seat (two–door Cab Plus) (if equipped)
To open, pull inboard and down on the seat strap.
To stow the seat, pull seat bottom back to the fully upright position.
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump
seat.
Center facing jump seat (four–door Cab Plus 4) (if equipped)
To open, pull seat assembly down,
then raise seatback.
To stow the seat, fold seat back
down and raise seat assembly to the
fully upright position.
WARNING: Do not install a
child seat in a center facing
jump seat.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
CIMS #75601
com_rear_seat_adjust
itdseq=90
CIMS #1124246
com_jump-seat.2doormbs
itdseq=91
CIMS #899696
com_rear-jump_seat.mbs
itdseq=92
CIMS #55015
com_seatbelts.01
itdseq=93
CIMS #683646
com_belt-precautions.mbs
itdseq=94
art=ranss526_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 65 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
65
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 66 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the
vehicles is moving. Adjusting the driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is stopped.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do
not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your
vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the
shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a
single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: On four-door Cab Plus 4 vehicles, do not open the
rear door when the rear seat belt is still buckled.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 66 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
66
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 67 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from) until
you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue
from the buckle.
The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard safety belt has two
types of locking modes described below:
Energy Management Feature
•This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
•This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to
help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Adjusting the center and rear center facing jump seat lap belts
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
CIMS #102366
com_manual-locking-belt.ran
itdseq=95
CIMS #803601
com_energ-man-feat.ran2
itdseq=96
CIMS #685451
com_lapbelts.mbs
itdseq=97
art=f12ss511_a
art=f12ss512_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 67 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
67
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 68 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as
possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to
position the lap belt correctly may cause serious injury in an
accident.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle.
To tighten the belt, pull the loose
end of the belt through the tongue
until it fits snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt
when not in use to keep the belt
away from door openings and
available after unfolding the
seats.
For the rear jump seat, shorten and
fold the belt into the seat when not
in use.
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode (outboard front passenger seating
position only) for use with child safety seats
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
CIMS #73763
com_vehicle-locking-mode.01
itdseq=98
CIMS #1124247
com_when_use-title.mbs
itdseq=99
CIMS #690605
com_when-to-use-lok-mode.mbs
itdseq=100
art=mbsss111_a
art=mbsss112_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 68 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
68
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 69 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
When to use the automatic locking mode
•Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front seat.
Refer to Safety Restraints for Children,Safety Seats for Children,
or Passenger airbag On/Off switch later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode (Outboard front passenger
seating position only) for use with child safety seats
•Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
•Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
•Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
CIMS #1124248
com_how-to-use-loc-mode.mbs
itdseq=101
CIMS #1099341
com_cancel-lock-mode.mbs
itdseq=102
art=enoss522_c
art=exdss025_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 69 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
69
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 70 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the entire seat belt
system should be checked for proper operation by an authorized
dealer. Verify that the (automatic locking retractors” in all
outboard seating positions are functioning properly.
Additionally check that the (automatic locking mode(feature
for child safety seat in the passenger outboard seating position
is functioning properly.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking
retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not
operating properly when checked according to the procedures in
Workshop Manual.
WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
front outboard passenger seating positions.
The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same
crash sensor system as the front airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap
and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance
section in this chapter.
WARNING: The driver and front passenger seat belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in
deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners.
Front safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front
passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder.
CIMS #594556
com_pretensioner-title
itdseq=103
CIMS #1217381
com_pretensioner.mbs
itdseq=104
CIMS #911066
com_height-adjust.mbs
itdseq=105
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 70 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
70
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 71 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Regular Cab and four–door Cab
Plus 4
•two–door Cab Plus
To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height
adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt assembly is too short for you, even when fully
extended, 20 cm (8 inches) can be added to the safety belt assembly by
adding a safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt extension assemblies
can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
CIMS #598712
com_extension-assy.j14
itdseq=106
art=ranss514_c
art=ranss513_c
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 71 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
71
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 72 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinderY
The BeltMinderyfeature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
CIMS #55029
com_light-chime.01
itdseq=107
CIMS #55036
com_operation.01
itdseq=108
CIMS #522761
com_belt_minder-title
itdseq=109
CIMS #690991
com_belt_minder.mbs
itdseq=110
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 72 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
72
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 73 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 5 km/h (3
mph) and 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to
ON...
The BeltMinderyfeature is activated -
the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for 6 seconds every 30
seconds, repeating for approximately
5 minutes or until driver’s safety belt
is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the safety belt
indicator light is illuminated
and the safety belt warning
chime is sounding...
The BeltMinderyfeature will not
activate.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The BeltMinderyfeature will not
activate.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts
(All statistics based on U.S. data):
Reasons given... Consider...
9Crashes are rare events936,700 crashes occur every day.
The more we drive, the more we are
exposed to 9rare9events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
9I’m not going far93of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles of home.
9Belts are uncomfortable9Safety belts are designed to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
CIMS #598714
com_safety_stats.j14
itdseq=111
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 73 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
73
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 74 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Reasons given... Consider...
9I was in a hurry9Prime time for an accident. Safety
Belt Warning Chime reminds us to
take a few seconds to buckle up.
9Seat belts don’t work9Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
9Traffic is light9Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
9Belts wrinkle my clothes9Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
9The people I’m with don’t
wear belts9
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
9I have an airbag9Airbags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
9I’d rather be thrown clear9Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T 9PICK OUR
CRASH9.
WARNING: Always wear the safety belt. Do not be tempted to
sit on top of the belt to fool police or to defeat the warning
system. The safety belt and safety belt warning system are
there to protect your life.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 74 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
74
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 75 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinderywill be disabled for that ignition
cycle only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder
Y
feature
Read Steps1-9thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The BeltMinderyfeature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are
met:
•The parking brake is set.
•The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral
position (manual transmission).
•The ignition switch is in the OFF position.
•All vehicle doors are closed.
•The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled.
•The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure).
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, do not
deactivate/activate the BeltMinderyfeature while driving the
vehicle.
BeltMinderyactivation and deactivation procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2
minutes.)
•Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
3. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three
times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done
before or during BeltMinderywarning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the
parklamps/headlamps.
CIMS #519736
com_one-time_disable
itdseq=112
CIMS #444324
com_minder_on-off
itdseq=113
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 75 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
75
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 76 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
5. At a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three
times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled.
•After Step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, at a
moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
•This will disable BeltMinderyif it is currently enabled, or enable
BeltMinderyif it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinderyis provided by the safety belt
warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinderyis provided by:
•The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three
seconds.
•Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off.
•Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per
second for three seconds.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged.
NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an
authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the safety belts to
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check
all automatic locking retractors on all outboard seating positions as well
as the automatic locking mode for child safety seats on the passenger
front belt. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front
seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if
equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt
guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket
assemblies (if equipped), LATCH child seat tether anchors and lower
anchors (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after
a collision. Mazda recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in
vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was
minor and an authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do not
show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is
noted.
CIMS #1112659
com_belt-maint.mbs
itdseq=114
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 76 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
76
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 77 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so
the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the
pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of
whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not.
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the
safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in
severe personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions
The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety
belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain
upper body injuries.
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT
inflate slowly or gently and the
risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is greatest close to the
trim covering the airbag
module. Always wear your
safety belt.
CIMS #599046
com_air-bag-systems.j14
itdseq=115
CIMS #683851
com_imp_precauts.mbs
itdseq=116
art=ranss510_f
art=mbsss107_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 77 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
77
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 78 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Airbags have been known to kill or injure a child in
front facing child restraints. When placing a child safety seat in
a front seating position including the center (if equipped), you
should turn off the passenger airbag switch after being certain
the child is properly restrained. If the child safety seat is in the
outboard seating position, slide the seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not install a
child seat in a center facing
jump seat.
WARNING: Rear facing child
seats should NEVER be placed
in the front seats unless the
passenger airbag switch is
turned off. See Passenger
airbag ON/OFF switch in this
chapter.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10
inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag
module.
WARNING: Never place your arm or feet over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures
or other injuries.
art=mbsss114_a
art=mbsss113_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 78 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
78
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 79 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Never place a rear facing infant seat in the front
seat unless the passenger air bag is turned off.
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
•Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module
including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag
inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
Airbag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your
authorized Mazda dealership.
WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle,
including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks
and snow plows may effect the performance of the airbag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front
end of the vehicle.
WARNING: Additional equipment may effect the performance
of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your
authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional
equipment.
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
CIMS #832821
com_imp_precauts.center
itdseq=117
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 79 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
79
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 80 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Children and airbags
For additional important safety information, read all information on
safety restraints in this guide.
WARNING: Never place a
rearward facing child safety
restraint in front of an
activated airbag. Airbags have
been known to kill or injure
children in front facing child
safety restraints. Whenever
placing a child safety seat in a
front seating position
(including center if equipped),
turn off the passenger side
airbag switch after being
certain the child is properly
restrained. If using a forward
facing child safety restraint in
the front outboard seat, slide
the seat all the way back, and
turn off the passenger airbag.
If using a rear facing child
safety seat in the front
outboard seating position,
make sure the passenger
airbag is turned off and slide
the passenger seat all the way
forward until the safety seat
rests on the dashboard. See
Passenger airbag on/off
switch in this chapter.
WARNING: Do not install a
child seat in a center facing
jump seat.
CIMS #1062867
com_children.mbs
itdseq=118
art=mbsss113_a
art=mbsss114_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 80 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
80
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 81 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Child seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless
passenger airbag switch is turned off. See Passenger airbag
on/off switch in this chapter.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?
The airbag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
The fact that the airbags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. Airbags are
designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,
side-impact, or rear-impacts.
CIMS #683852
com_how_work.mbs
itdseq=119
art=comss002_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 81 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
81
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 82 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
The airbags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
airbag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be
burned.
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The SRS consists of:
•driver and passenger airbag modules (which include the inflators and
airbags),
•passenger airbag deactivation switch and restraint control module
(RCM)
•a readiness light and tone,
art=comss003_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 82 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
82
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 83 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•and the electrical wiring which connects the components.
•Safety belt pretensioners
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits
and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring (including the
passenger airbag deactivation switch, the system wiring, the airbag
system readiness light, the airbag back up power and the airbag
ignitors).
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster and the
passenger airbag deactivate switch or a tone to indicate the condition of
the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the
Instrumentation chapter or Passenger airbag deactivate switch
section in this chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
•The readiness lights will either
flash or stay lit.
•The readiness lights will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.
WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including safety
belt pretensioners)
For disposal of safety belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped
vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership or qualified technician.
Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.
CIMS #683853
com_deter_operational.mbs
itdseq=120
CIMS #683854
com_disposing.mbs
itdseq=121
art=ranis319_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 83 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
83
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 84 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Passenger airbag ON/OFF switch
WARNING: An airbag ON/OFF
switch has been installed in
this vehicle. Before driving,
always look at the face of the
switch to be sure the switch is
in the proper position in
accordance with these
instructions and warnings.
Failure to put the switch in a
proper position can increase
the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision.
Turning the passenger airbag off
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Insert the ignition key, turn the
switch to OFF position and hold
in OFF position while removing
the key.
3. When the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position the
OFF light illuminates briefly,
momentarily shuts off and then
turns back on. This indicates that the passenger airbag is
deactivated. Do not use a second key to turn off the passenger
airbag, as the lock position might be changed without your knowing.
ON OFF
OFF
PASSENGER AIRBAG
ON OFF
OFF
PASSENGER AIRBAG
CIMS #683855
com_deactivate.mbs
itdseq=122
art=ranss502_a
art=ranss501_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 84 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
84
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 85 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: You must turn the passenger airbag Off if you have
a rear facing child seat in the front seat of the pickup (the
center lapbelt on front split seats or the center facing rear
seats do not accommodate child seats). Statistics show that
children under 12 are more likely to suffer minor injuries in the
front passenger seats than adults. If you must have a child in
the front passenger seat, place the largest child in the front
seat, make sure that the child is belted, the vehicle seat is all
the way back, and the passenger airbag is turned OFF. The front
seat center lap belt and the center facing rear seats do not
accommodate child seats; therefore, you may not be able to put
a larger child in the front passenger seat if a child seat is
involved.
WARNING: If the OFF light fails to illuminate when the
passenger airbag switch is in the OFF position and the ignition
switch is in the ON position, have the passenger airbag switch
serviced at your authorized Mazda dealership.
WARNING: In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the
switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air
bag ON/OFF switch.
Turning the passenger airbag back on
The passenger airbag remains OFF until you turn it back ON.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn
the switch to ON.
2. The OFF light will briefly
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to ON. This indicates
that the passenger airbag is
operational.
ON OFF
OFF
PASSENGER AIRBAG
art=ranss500_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 85 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
85
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 86 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: If the light is illuminated when the passenger
airbag ON/OFF switch is in the ON position and the ignition
switch is ON, have the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch serviced
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.
The passenger side airbag should always be ON (the airbag OFF light
should not be illuminated) except for certain vulnerable persons. See
guidance on following pages.
WARNING: The safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to
function together with the airbags in certain types of crashes.
When you turn OFF your airbag, you not only lose the
protection of the airbag, you also may reduce the effectiveness
of your safety belt system, which was designed to work with the
airbag. Most vehicles with full back seats do not have cut-off
switches, but NHTSA and Transport Canada will allow a cut-off
switch to be installed on request for a certain category of
persons who must ride up front and there is a concern about
riding there. Please see the guidance below.
WARNING: Always use safety belts and child restraints
properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be
transported in front, the passenger airbag must be turned OFF.
This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the
inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when
the airbag inflates is substantial.
The vast majority of drivers and passengers over the age of 12 years are
much safer with an airbag than without. To do their job and reduce the
risk of life threatening injuries, airbags must open with great force, and
this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations,
particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The
most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary airbag injuries
without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all
occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front
seat. This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the airbags
to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide. If
you choose to deactivate your airbag, you are losing the very significant
risk reducing benefits of the airbag and you are also reducing the
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 86 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
86
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 87 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
effectiveness of the safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles
are designed to work as a safety system with the airbags.
Read all airbag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other
important airbag instructions and Warnings in this Owner’s Guide.
NHTSA gives permission to install airbag cut-off switches in the
following terms:
1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing
infant seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that
the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat
because:
•the vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or
•the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which,
according to his or her physician:
•causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger;
and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater
than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a
crash.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 87 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
87
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 88 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and right front passenger. These particular
belts are specifically designed to work with airbags to help
reduce the risk of injury in a collision. The energy management
safety belt is designed to give or release additional belt
webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force on
an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the
airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and
the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the
airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under
the NHTSA deactivation criteria.
Transport Canada gives permission to install airbag cut-off
switches in the following terms:
1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat
because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant
seat; or
•the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s
physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition.
2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the
front seat because:
•my vehicle has no rear seat;
•although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever
possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes
ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or
•the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s
physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can monitor the child’s condition.
3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that,
according to his or her physician:
•poses a special risk for the passenger if the airbag deploys; and
•makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag deployment
greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the airbag and
experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the airbag
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 88 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
88
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 89 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: This vehicle has special energy management safety
belts for the driver and/or right front passenger. These
particular belts are specifically designed to work with airbags
to help reduce the risk of injury in a collision. The energy
management safety belt is designed to give or release additional
belt webbing in some accidents to reduce concentration of force
on an occupant’s chest and reduce the risk of certain bone
fractures and injuries to underlying organs. In a crash, if the
airbag is turned OFF, this energy management safety belt might
permit the person wearing the belt to move forward enough to
incur a serious or fatal injury. The more severe the crash, and
the heavier the occupant, the greater the risk is. Be sure the
airbag is turned ON for any person who does not qualify under
the Transport Canada deactivation criteria.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.
Important child restraint precautions
NOTE: You are required by law to use a child-restraint system in the
U.S. and Canada. Many states require that children use approved booster
seats until they are eight years old. Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children
in your vehicle.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
NOTE: Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any
infant or child restraint you might use.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat,
position the vehicle seat fully rearward and turn the passenger
airbag off.
CIMS #52677
com_safety-for-kids
itdseq=123
CIMS #683856
com_imp_precautions.mbs
itdseq=124
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 89 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
89
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 90 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: An airbag can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Child seats should never be placed in the front seats, unless
passenger airbag switch is turned off, See Passenger airbag
on/off switch.
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.
Also, slide the front seat forward until the rear facing child seat
contacts the dash board for maximum support. (All other
children and forward facing child seats and booster seats should
be on front seats that are slid back as far away as possible from
the dashboard.
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump
seat.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
CIMS #1065521
com_safety_belts.mbs
itdseq=125
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 90 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
90
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 91 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets
unattended in your vehicle. Leaving a child or an animal
unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather,
temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause
brain damage or even death. Always take all children and
animals with you or leave a responsible person with them.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous.
This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed.
They could play with power windows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in your vehicle
with children.
WARNING: Placing a child, 12 years or younger, in the front
seat is dangerous. The child could be hit by a deploying airbag
and be seriously injured or even killed. Never place a child
safety seat in a center facing rear jump seat. If you must place
a child safety seat in a front seating position, make sure the
passenger airbag is turned off. See Turning the airbag Off in
this section. Never use a rear-facing child restraint system in
the front seat with an airbag that could deploy.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda recommends use of a
belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lb. (about 8 to 12 years old).
CIMS #992731
com_booster_seat.mazda
itdseq=126
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 91 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
91
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 92 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
•Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
•Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
•Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, use a
high-backed booster seat.
art=cgrss526_b
art=mbsss109_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 92 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
92
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 93 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb..
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with combination lap/shoulder belts.
WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the booster seat.
WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or
behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the
upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or
death in a collision.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a
child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of
injury or death in a collision.
art=mbsss110_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 93 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
93
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 94 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
•Review and follow the information
presented in the Airbag
Supplemental Restraint System
section in this chapter.
•Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
•Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump
seat.
•Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place seat back in upright position.
•Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front seat).
•LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and
CIMS #52706
com_child-seat-title
itdseq=127
CIMS #1250809
com_child-safe-seats.mbs2
itdseq=128
art=comss006_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 94 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
94
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 95 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this
chapter.
WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat you put in your
vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts (front outboard passenger seat only)
1. Position the child safety seat in
a seat with a combination lap
and shoulder belt.
WARNING: If there is a tether on the child safety seat, attach
it to the tether anchor point. Refer to Attaching child safety
seats with tether straps in this chapter.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear facing child seat in the right front seat
unless the airbag on/off switch is turned OFF. If you place a
forward-facing child seat in the right front seat, turn the airbag
on/off switch to OFF. See Passenger airbag on/off switch in
this chapter.
CIMS #1124877
com_install-seat_title.mazda
itdseq=129
CIMS #1062868
com_install-seat.mbs
itdseq=130
art=f12ss008_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 95 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
95
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 96 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in
the front seats unless the passenger airbag switch is turned off.
Also, slide the front seat forward until the rear facing child seat
contacts the dash board for maximum support. (All other
children and forward facing child seats and booster seats should
be on front seats that are slid back as far away as possible from
the dashboard.)
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder
belt and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route
the tongue through the child
seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle
closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear
and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
art=f12ss009_a
art=f12ss010_a
art=exdss029_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 96 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
96
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 97 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp
the shoulder portion of the belt
and pull downward until all of
the belt is extracted and a click
is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle
and pull up on the shoulder belt
while pushing down with knee
on the child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract
to remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly tilt the seat
forward and back to make sure
the seat is securely held in
place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be
no more than one inch of
movement for proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more
belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat
Steps two through nine.
11. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.
art=f12ss012_a
art=f12ss013_a
art=musss552_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 97 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
97
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 98 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back of the front
seat cushion.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
•Bucket seats
•60/40 seats
WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate
tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether
anchor.
CIMS #1062869
com_built-in_anchors.mbs
itdseq=131
art=ranss564_a
art=mbsss100_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 98 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
98
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 99 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: This anchor information applies to child safety
seats equipped with tether straps. For child safety seats
equipped with LATCH anchors, refer to Attaching safety seats
with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
attachments for child seat anchors in this chapter.
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seat tethers to a
single tether anchor. In a crash, on anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
1. Position the child safety seat on the front seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
The tether anchor is located on the
rear lower portion of the passenger
seat.
art=ranss573_a
art=ranss574_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 99 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
99
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 100 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4. Clip the tether strap to the
anchor.
WARNING: If the tether strap
is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event
of a collision.
Center seating location 60/40
seats with folding armrest
When installing a child safety seat in the center position, route the tether
strap over the center arm rest and clip it to the center anchor.
art=ranss575_a
art=ranss576_a
art=ranss577_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 100 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
100
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 101 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a
collision.
5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and
shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further
instructions to secure the child safety seat.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk
of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
Your vehicle may be equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat
installation at the following seating positions:
•Bucket seats
CIMS #1054761
com_latch.bseries
itdseq=132
art=mbsss104_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 101 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
101
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 102 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•60/40 seats
represents LATCH anchors.
represents tether strap anchors.
To improve child seat protection, use the tether anchor when using the
LATCH to install a child safety seat. See Attaching child safety seats
with tether straps in this section.
WARNING: Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the
same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough
to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break,
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the LATCH type seat in the center seat
position — it only has one possible anchor point and the seat
will not be properly attached.
WARNING: If there are two LATCH seats to install — you can
only mount one LATCH seat in this vehicle with the LATCH
anchor bars. You need to mount the second seat with the center
seat belt using the lap belt method and the child safety seat
tether (if equipped).
WARNING: Do not attach two seats to one LATCH anchor bar.
art=mbsss105_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 102 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
102
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 103 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the front passenger seat
between the cushion and seat back.
The LATCH anchors are below
locator symbols on the seat back.
Two plastic LATCH guides may be
purchased from your local Mazda
dealer (part number 1F60–57–751).
They snap onto the latch lower
anchor in the vehicle to help attach
a child seat with rigid latch
attachments. It will hold the seat
foam away and expose the anchor
making attachment of the child seat
easier.
Make sure you attach the proper
child safety seat tether after
securing the LATCH.
WARNING: If the tether strap
is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event
of a collision.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
WARNING: Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat
only to the anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child
art=vilss601_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 103 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
103
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 104 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk
of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases.
WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a
collision.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 104 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Seating and Safety Restraints
104
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 105 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
•Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
•Keep tires properly inflated;
•Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
•Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. All occupants must wear safety belts and children/infants
must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury
or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
CIMS #1434023
com_drive-veh-utility
itdseq=133
CIMS #1434024
com_veh-handle-title
itdseq=134
CIMS #1434025
com_veh-system
itdseq=135
art=supfw007_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 105 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
105
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 106 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on
transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the
Driving chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
•Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
•Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
CIMS #1434026
com_veh-dr-differs
itdseq=136
art=supfw001_a
art=supfw010_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 106 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
106
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 107 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
•Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Mazda to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
CIMS #599889
com_tire_grade_info.j14
itdseq=137
CIMS #54583 com_treads.01
itdseq=138
art=supfw009_a
art=f12mc027_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 107 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
107
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 108 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
NOTE: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
•Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
CIMS #599890
com_traction_a-b-c.j14
itdseq=139
CIMS #600046
com_temp_a-b-c.j14
itdseq=140
CIMS #1272072
com_tire-intro itdseq=141
CIMS #1272100
com_glossary-of-tire-terms
itdseq=142
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 108 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
108
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 109 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
•Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry
a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
•kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
•Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
•Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure
found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
•B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
CIMS #1444637
com_gen-tire-ins.mazda
itdseq=143
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 109 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
109
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 110 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if equipped).
Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by Mazda.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station
gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or dial
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
NOTE: If you are driving the vehicle at its maximum weight load, make
sure the tire inflation pressure is correct for the weight load on the tires.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or (blowout(, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and
internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.
A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to
be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
CIMS #1302691
com_tire-inflate-mazda
itdseq=144
art=ecomc021_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 110 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
110
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 111 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label which
is located on the structure by the trailing edge of the driver’s door or the
edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of
1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently
and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more than 1
mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot
from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi (4.15
bars). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 111 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
111
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 112 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at
the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.
Tire wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or “wear bars”, which
look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear
on the tire when the tread is worn
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be
replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
CIMS #1272124
com_care-for-tires
itdseq=145
CIMS #1444638
com_tire-inspection
itdseq=146
CIMS #1272512
com_tire-wear itdseq=147
CIMS #1512511
com_tire-damage
itdseq=148
art=tsnmc001_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 112 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
112
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 113 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is
recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires
due to the aging of the spare tire.
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
•Observe posted speed limits
•Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
•Avoid potholes and objects on the road
•Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire
and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three
to five seconds.
WARNING: Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55
km/h) point indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
CIMS #1512512 com_tire-age
itdseq=149
CIMS #1272513
com_tire-safety-practices
itdseq=150
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 113 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
113
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 114 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a
Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels.
The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an
ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the
time they are installed.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and
Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing
better tire performance and longer tire life.
CIMS #1302692
com_tire-align-mazda
itdseq=151
CIMS #1350081
com_rotate-tires-mazda
itdseq=152
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 114 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
114
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 115 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram) art=f23mc121_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 115 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
115
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 116 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire
imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
CIMS #1348871
com_tire-replace-req
itdseq=153
art=f23mc122_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 116 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
116
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 117 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by
Mazda. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
Important: Remember to replace the valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans
and light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
CIMS #1296916
com_sidewall-info
itdseq=154
CIMS #1272097
com_pass-tire-information
itdseq=155
art=f23mc119_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 117 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
117
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 118 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
is designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.
The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted
for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 118 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
118
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 119 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the
tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are
identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number
of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon,
polyester, and others.
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your
vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
•Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
•Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 119 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
119
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 120 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
•Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for
service on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
CIMS #1272098
com_lt-tire-information
itdseq=156
art=f23mc120_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 120 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
120
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 121 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service
on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds
for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle
components.
CIMS #1280261
com_t-tire-information
itdseq=157
CIMS #1450451
com_placard-loc-ref
itdseq=158
CIMS #
com_snow_tires_chains.mbs
itdseq=159
art=f23mc123_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 121 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
121
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 122 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
NOTE: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains, it is
recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and
specifications as those originally installed.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
•Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the
wheels.
•Use only SAE Class S chains.
•Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
Drive cautiously. Ensure you obtain the proper cables or chains
for you vehicle. Test fit the cables or chains before using them in
snow and/or ice. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang
against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.
Have the cables or chains fitted by a professional before
proceeding.
•If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
•The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
CIMS #1355516
com_load-label-def
itdseq=160
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 122 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
122
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 123 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle
can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.
art=f23gf110_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 123 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
123
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 124 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Example only:
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
art=f23gf111_d
art=f23gf117_b
art=f23gf112_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 124 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
124
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 125 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification
Label axle weight rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
art=f23gf113_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 125 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
125
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 126 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door.
The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification
Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
art=f23gf114_b
art=f23gf115_c
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 126 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
126
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 127 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR
and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation
could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal
injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 127 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
127
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 128 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635–340 (5 x 68) =
295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
•Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 –
(5 x 220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (5
x 99 kg) — (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 — 495 — 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
•A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x
100) = 1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (12 x 45 kg) = 635 —
198 — 540 = —103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at
least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags,
then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 lb. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. .
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg — (2 x 99 kg) — (9
x45kg)=635—198—405=32kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 128 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
128
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 129 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully after any towing operation.
4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Regular Cab
2.3L All 4,800 (2,177) 1,600 (726) Equal to
frontal area
of vehicle
CIMS #954537
com_loading-warnings.fly
itdseq=161
CIMS #101936
com_towing.title
itdseq=162
CIMS #685186
com_towing.bseries
itdseq=163
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 129 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
129
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 130 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,680 (1,216) 50 (4.64)
3.0L*
Dual
Sport
4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,540 (1,152) 50 (4.64)
Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4
2.3L All 4,800 (2,177) 1,440 (653) Equal to
frontal area
of vehicle
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,480 (1,125) 50 (4.64)
3.0L*
Dual
Sport
4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,380 (1,080) 50 (4.64)
4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,420 (1,551) 50 (4.64)
4.0L Dual
Sport
All 7,000 (3,175) 3,300 (1,497) 50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier
in this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier
in this chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 130 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
130
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 131 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Regular Cab
2.3L All 4,800 (2,177) 1,600 (726) Equal to
frontal area
of vehicle
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,660 (1,206) 50 (4.64)
3.0L*
Dual
Sport
4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,500 (1,134) 50 (4.64)
Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4
2.3L All 4,800 (2,177) 1,440 (653) Equal to
frontal area
of vehicle
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,500 (1,134) 50 (4.64)
3.0L*
Dual
Sport
4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,380 (1,080) 50 (4.64)
4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,440 (1,560) 50 (4.64)
4.0L Dual
Sport
All 7,000 (3,175) 3,320 (1,506) 50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier
in this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier
in this chapter.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 131 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
131
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 132 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4x2 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
4x4 w/manual transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Regular Cab
3.0L* All 6,000 (2,722) 2,360 (1,070) 50 (4.64)
4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,280 (1,487) 50 (4.64)
Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4
4.0L All 7,000 (3,175) 3,140 (1,424) 50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) of elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in
this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this
chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 132 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
132
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 133 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4x2 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Regular Cab
2.3L All 5,500 (2,495) 2,260 (1,025) Equal to
frontal area
of vehicle
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,620 (1,188) 50 (4.64)
3.0L*
Dual
Sport
4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,460 (1,115) 50 (4.64)
Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,460 (1,115) 50 (4.64)
3.0L*
Dual
Sport
4.10 6,000 (2,722) 2,340 (1,061) 50 (4.64)
4.0L All 9,500 (4,309) 5,880 (2,667) 50 (4.64)
4.0L Dual
Sport
All 9,500 (4,309) 5,760 (2,612) 50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier
in this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular
vehicle, see Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier
in this chapter.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 133 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
133
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 134 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4x2 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
4x4 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle
ratio
Maximum
GCWR - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight - lb.
(kg)
Maximum
frontal area
of trailer -
ft
2
(m
2
)
Regular Cab
3.0L* 3.73 6,000 (2,722) 2,320 (1,052) 50 (4.64)
4.0L All 9,500 (4,309) 5,740 (2,603) 50 (4.64)
Cab Plus/Cab Plus 4
4.0L All 9,500 (4,309) 5,600 (2,540) 50 (4.64)
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300
meters) of elevation.
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in
this chapter.
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow earlier in this
chapter.
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR).
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 134 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
134
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 135 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
The certification label is found on the driver’s door latch pillar.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural
damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb. (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch
and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the
underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for
trailers over 2,000 lb. (907 kg).
Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch
which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if
they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable
rental agency.
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all
mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious
gases or water from entering.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
CIMS #53196
com_prep-and-hitches
itdseq=164
CIMS #710091
com_hitches.mbs
itdseq=165
CIMS #81316
com_safety-chains
itdseq=166
CIMS #81317
com_trailer-brakes
itdseq=167
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 135 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
135
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 136 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your chances of having a
collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper
The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires
only a ball with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a
2,000 lb. (907 kg) trailer weight and 200 lb. (91 kg) tongue weight
capability.
The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the
factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed
directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either
lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will
significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This
can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use
of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse.
Trailer tow connector
The trailer tow connector is located
under the rear bumper, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:
1
2
3
4
CIMS #81318
com_trailer-lamps
itdseq=168
CIMS #710092
com_use-step-bumper.mbs
itdseq=169
CIMS #476432
com_towconnect.ran
itdseq=170
art=ranmc721_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 136 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
136
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 137 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Trailer tow connector
Color Function Comment
1. Dark Green Trailer right-hand
turn signal
Circuit activated when brake
pedal is depressed or when
ignition is on and right-hand
turn signal is applied.
2. Yellow Trailer left-hand turn
signal
Circuit activated when brake
pedal is depressed or when
ignition is on and left-hand
turn signal is applied.
3. Tan/White Tail lamp Relay controlled circuit
activated when the park
lamps/headlamps are on.
4. White Ground Matching vehicle circuit
returns to battery’s negative
ground.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
•Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h), and don’t make
full throttle starts.
•Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
•Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
•To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the
Driving chapter.)
•Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside
temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate
higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed
until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to
Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
•Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
•Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
CIMS #1514926
com_drivin-while-you-tow.mbs
itdseq=171
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 137 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
137
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 138 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your service maintenance section
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
•Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
•Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
•The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
•If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly
conditions, at GCW, or any combination of these factors, consider
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.
•After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
•To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
•do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
•do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
CIMS #83488
com_towing-tips.02
itdseq=172
CIMS #81391
com_launch-retrieving_boat.1
itdseq=173
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 138 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
138
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 139 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•causing internal damage to the components.
•affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
Note: 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission follow these
guidelines for recreational towing:
Before you have your vehicle towed:
•Release the parking brake.
•Move the gearshift to the neutral position.
•Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.
•The maximum recommended speed is 55 mph (88 km/h).
•The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.
•Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)
•The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transmission components.
In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions
provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing
apparatus if one has been installed.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission
4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission follow these
guidelines for recreational towing:
•Release the parking brake.
•Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.
•Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
•Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
•Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.
•Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)
CIMS #555656
com_recreational-towing.ran
itdseq=174
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 139 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
139
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 140 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must
be exceeded, you must disconnect the front (4x4 only) and rear
driveshafts. Mazda recommends the driveshafts be removed/installed only
by a qualified technician at an authorized dealer. See your authorized
dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the
driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case
components.
CAMPER BODIES
Your pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies.
CIMS #695136
com_no-camper.bseries
itdseq=175
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 140 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Tires, Wheels and Loading
140
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 141 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the
electrical accessories such as
the radio to operate while the
engine is not running.
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal.
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and
all accessories without locking
the steering wheel. This position
also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from
the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed.
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking
brake.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.
Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of
radio noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
1
2
34
5
CIMS #727778
com_starting-title
itdseq=176
CIMS #77457
com_ignition_positions.04
itdseq=177
CIMS #1129631
com_starting-vehicle.mbs
itdseq=178
art=exdto300_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 141 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
141
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 142 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding
against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive
if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:
CIMS #684692
com_imp-precautions.mbs
itdseq=179
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 142 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
142
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 143 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Make sure the parking brake is
set.
•Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
If starting a vehicle with a manual
transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
2. Push the clutch pedal to the
floor.
3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
If there is difficulty in turning the key, firmly rotate the steering wheel
left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when:
•front wheels are turned
•front wheel is against the curb
•steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle
1
2
34
5
art=unogf300_f
art=rangf120_a
art=ctogf111_a
art=exdto300_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 143 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
143
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 144 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information
regarding the warning lights.
Starting the engine
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START). If
there is difficulty in turning the
key, rotate the steering wheel
until the key turns freely. This
condition may occur when:
•the front wheels are turned
•a front wheel is against the curb
Turn the key to 5 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
If the engine fails to start using the preceding instructions (flexible
fuel vehicles only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to
start, repeat Step 1.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive
if you smell exhaust fumes.
3
2
1
5
4
CIMS #1129632
com_start.mbs itdseq=180
CIMS #412567
com_no-start.01
itdseq=181
CIMS #954491
com_guarding-fumes.fly
itdseq=182
art=f12st004_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 144 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
144
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 145 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
USING THE ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night
before starting the vehicle.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged
(cheater) adapters.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s
anti-lock brake system.
NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and
begin to drive away.
A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If
a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle
P!
BRAKE
CIMS #954493
com_ventilation.fly
itdseq=183
CIMS #954489
com_engine-block-heater.fly
itdseq=184
CIMS #954495
com_brake_info.fly
itdseq=185
CIMS #713206
com_abs_info.mbs
itdseq=186
art=dnogf004_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 145 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
145
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 146 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
The ABS operates by detecting the
onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for
this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when
the brakes are firmly applied. The
accompanying illustration depicts
the advantage of an ABS equipped
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking
traction.
WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time
necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping
distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to stop.
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)
ABS
P!
BRAKE
CIMS #954499
com_abs_use.fly
itdseq=187
CIMS #954498
com_abs_warn.fly
itdseq=188
art=comss004_a
art=dnogf001_a
art=dnogf004_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 146 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
146
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 147 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).
NOTE: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Pull the release lever to release the
brake.
Driving with the parking brake
on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
BRAKE
RELEASE
P!
BRAKE
BRAKE
RELEASE
CIMS #684693
com_park_brake.mbs
itdseq=189
art=unogf300_c
art=dnogf004_a
art=unogf301_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 147 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
147
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 148 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the power steering pump:
•Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
•Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
•Uneven vehicle loading
•High crown in center of road
•High crosswinds
•Wheels out of alignment
•Loose or worn suspension components
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
CIMS #244756
com_steering.04
itdseq=190
CIMS #954505
com_axle-statement.fly
itdseq=191
CIMS #954507
com_prep-to-drive.fly
itdseq=192
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 148 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
148
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 149 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra
precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn
ignition key to LOCK, then
remove the key.
2. Insert the key and turn it to
OFF. Apply the brake pedal
and shift to N (Neutral) .
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking
brake.
CIMS #197246
com_auto-trans.ie
itdseq=193
CIMS #1124643 com_bsi.mbs
itdseq=194
art=mbsto300_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 149 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
149
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 150 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 150 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
150
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 151 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the
gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not
hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly
and injure someone.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
•Start the engine
•Depress the brake pedal
•Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
•Come to a complete stop
•Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your
vehicle.
CIMS #1129633
com_5r55e.mbs
itdseq=195
art=rangf120_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 151 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
151
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 152 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through
five. (Overdrive) can be
deactivated by pressing the
transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever.
This will illuminate the O/D OFF
lamp and activate Drive.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
•This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
•O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
•Provides engine braking.
•Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
•To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
•O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
O/D
ON/OFF
O/D
OFF
art=rangf110_a
art=expis024_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 152 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
152
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 153 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive.
•Depress the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Using the clutch
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
To start the vehicle:
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the
neutral position.
3. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal and release the parking
brake.
4. Move the gearshift lever to 1st gear, then slowly release the clutch
pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator.
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased
shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or damage the
transmission. Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t
interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch
pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These
actions will reduce the life of the clutch.
Recommended shift speeds
Downshift according to the following charts for your specific
engine/drivetrain combination:
135
24R
CIMS #72083 com_manual
itdseq=196
CIMS #72084
com_using_clutch.rwd
itdseq=197
CIMS #1124644
com_shift-speeds.mbs
itdseq=198
art=ctogf101_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 153 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
153
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 154 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Upshifts
Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped)
2WD and 4H 4L
1 -2 10 mph (16 km/h) 4 mph (6 km/h)
2 - 3 19 mph (26 km/h) 8 mph (10 km/h)
3 - 4 28 mph (43 km/h) 12 mph (16 km/h)
4 - 5 (Overdrive) 40 mph (68 km/h) 16 mph (26 km/h)
Maximum downshift speeds
Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped)
2WD and 4H 4L
5 (Overdrive) - 4 55 mph (88 km/h) 22 mph (34 km/h)
4 - 3 45 mph (72 km/h) 18 mph (27 km/h)
3 - 2 35 mph (56 km/h) 14 mph (21 km/h)
2 - 1 20 mph (32 km/h) 8 mph (11 km/h)
Reverse
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).
•The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).
Parking your vehicle
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).
3. Turn the ignition off.
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set
the parking brake fully.
CIMS #1035364
com_reverse.uno
itdseq=199
CIMS #72086
com_parking.rwd
itdseq=200
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 154 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
154
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 155 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Removing the key
Turn the ignition off, push the
release lever (located above the
ignition), then turn the key toward
you and remove the key.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in
this chapter.
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper
operation.
4WD system indicator lights
•4x4 - Momentarily illuminates
when the vehicle is started.
Illuminates when 4H (4WD High)
is engaged.
PUSH
4x4
CIMS #1035362
com_remove-key
itdseq=201
CIMS #1058177
com_rocking-vehicle
itdseq=202
CIMS #73625 com_four_wd
itdseq=203
CIMS #1114726
com_4wd-lights.ran2003
itdseq=204
art=rangf114_a
art=f12ip031_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 155 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
155
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 156 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•4x4 LOW – Momentarily
illuminates when the vehicle is
started. Illuminates when 4L
(4WD Low) is engaged.
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)
2WD - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and highway
driving.
4X4 HIGH - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in
off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.
4X4 LOW - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four
wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep
grades or pulling heavy objects. 4X4 LOW will not engage while the
vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for concern.
Refer to Shifting to/from 4X4 for proper operation.
Shifting between 2WD and 4X4 HIGH
•Move the 4WD control between 2WD and 4X4 HIGH at any forward
speed.
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.
Shifting to/from 4X4 LOW
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop
2. Depress the brake
3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the
transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, depress the clutch.
4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.
•If shifting into 4X4 LOW, wait for the 4WD LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.
4x4
LOW
4X4
HIGH
2WD 4X4
LOW
CIMS #1124645
com_electronic-4wd.mbs
itdseq=205
art=expis340_a
art=rangf107_c
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 156 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
156
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 157 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•If shifting out of 4X4 LOW, wait for the 4WD LOW light in the
instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.
Driving off-road with 4WD
Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Trucks and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
•Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
CIMS #83537
com_driving-offroad.02
itdseq=206
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 157 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
157
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 158 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and
reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly
on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 158 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
158
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 159 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and
tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 159 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
159
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 160 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause
internal transmission damage.
Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the
life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or
changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required.
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up,
straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the
other side of a hill before driving over the crest.
When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting
to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This
reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear
when added engine braking is desired.
When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed
may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load.
If vehicle speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h), the speed control
will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal.
If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing
and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 30 mph [50
km/h]).
Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep
grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of (Overdrive) into
a lower gear.
Driving on snow and ice
A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow
the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady
pressure on the brake pedal.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 160 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
160
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 161 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is
not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
CIMS #954533
com_deep-water.fly
itdseq=207
art=taumc713_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 161 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Driving
161
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 162 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
CIMS #
com_hazard-flasher-info
itdseq=208
CIMS #1296506
com_fuel-pump-shutoff.ran
itdseq=209
art=rancf500_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 162 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
162
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 163 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located under the right-hand side of
the glove box, just above the carpet.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset
the switch by pushing in on the
reset button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
15
CIMS #55291
com_fuses-relays.01
itdseq=210
CIMS #55297 com_fuse.01
itdseq=211
art=raner102_c
art=dnoer001_c
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 163 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
163
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 164 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — — —
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue — Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural — Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel
The fuse panel is located under the
right-hand side of the instrument
panel behind the kick panel. A fuse
puller tool is located near the top
left corner of the fuse box; this tool
will assist you in pulling the fuses
out for inspection, if necessary.
CIMS #55301
com_fuse_amp_rating.01
itdseq=212
CIMS #1252347
com_passenger-title.ran
itdseq=213
art=raner523_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 164 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
164
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 165 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 5A Instrument panel dimmer switch
2 10A Trailer tow park lamps
3 10A Right low beam headlamp
4 10A Left low beam headlamp
5 30A Windshield wipers/washer
6 10A Radio (RUN/ACCY)
7 5A Headlamp switch illumination
8 10A Restraints Control Module (RCM),
PADI (Passenger Air bag
Deactivation Indicator)
9 5A Cluster air bag indicator
10 10A Cluster (RUN/START), 4x4
module (RUN/START)
CIMS #683868
com_passenger-mbs
itdseq=214
art=raner505_c
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 165 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
165
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 166 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
11 10A Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Logic
power)
12 — Not used
13 15A Horn, Interior lamps
14 15A High beam headlamp, High beam
indicator (cluster)
15 — One-touch down relay
16 30A cartridge
fuse
Power windows
17 15A Turn signals/Hazards
18 — Not used
19 20A Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL)/Stop lamps
20 10A Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
module, Brake-shift interlock,
Speed control module, Back-up
lamps, Overdrive cancel switch,
Electronic flasher (turn/hazard)
21 5A Starter relay coil
22 5A Radio (START), 4x4 Neutral
sense (manual only)
23 30A Headlamps (low and high beam)
24 20A Radio battery feed (B+)
25 — Accessory relay
26 2A Brake pressure switch
27 10A Climate control blower relay/blend
doors, 4x4 module
28 15A 4x4 module battery feed (B+)
29 20A Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector
(OBD II)
30 5A Power mirrors
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 166 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
166
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 167 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
31 20A Front park lamps, Rear park
lamps, License plate lamps,
Dimmer switch, Trailer tow park
lamps
32 5A Brake switch (logic)
33 5A Instrument cluster battery feed
(B+)
34 20A Power point
35 15A Power locks
Power distribution box
The power distribution box is
located in the engine compartment.
The power distribution box contains
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting
the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
CIMS #1273111
com_power-dist-title.mbs
itdseq=215
art=raner500_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 167 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
167
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 168 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
2.3L engine (if equipped)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
1 40A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel
2 — Not used
3 40A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel
4 — Not used
5 50A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel
6 — Not used
7 40A** Starter solenoid
8 — Not used
9 40A** Ignition switch
10 — Not used
11 30A** Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), Engine sensors
CIMS #708397
com_power-box-mbs.23l
itdseq=216
art=raner512_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 168 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
168
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 169 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
12 — Not used
13 30A** Blower motor (climate control)
14 — Not used
15 — Not used
16 — Not used
17 40A** ABS (motor)
18 — Not used
19 20A** Engine fan
20 — Not used
21 10A* PCM keep alive power
22 — Not used
23 20A* Fuel pump
24 — Not used
25 10A* A/C clutch solenoid
26 — Not used
27 — Not used
28 — Not used
29 — Not used
30 — Not used
31 — Not used
32 — Not used
33 30A* Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(solenoids)
34 — Not used
35 — Not used
36 — Not used
37 — Not used
38 7.5A* Trailer tow (right turn)
39 — Not used
40 — Not used
41 15A* HEGOs
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 169 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
169
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 170 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
42 7.5A* Trailer tow (left turn)
43 — Not used
44 — Not used
45A — Wiper HI/LO relay
45B — Wiper Park/Run relay
46A — Fuel pump relay
46B — Washer pump relay
47 — Engine fan relay
48 — Starter relay
49 — Not used
50 — Not used
51 — Not used
52 — Not used
53 — Not used
54 — PCM relay
55 — Blower relay
56A — A/C clutch solenoid relay
56B — Not used
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 170 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
170
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 171 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3.0L and 4.0L engines (if equipped)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
1 40A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel
2 — Not used
3 40A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel
4 — Not used
5 50A** Passenger compartment fuse
panel
6 — Not used
7 40A** Starter solenoid
8 — Not used
9 40A** Ignition switch
10 — Not used
11 30A** Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
relay fuse
CIMS #683869
com_power-box-mbs
itdseq=217
art=raner514_d
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 171 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
171
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 172 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
12 — Not used
13 30A** Blower motor (climate control)
14 — Not used
15 — Not used
16 — Not used
17 40A** ABS (motor)
18 — Not used
19 — Not used
20 — Not used
21 10A* PCM keep alive power
22 — Not used
23 20A* Fuel pump
24 — Not used
25 10A* A/C clutch solenoid
26 — Not used
27 20A* 4x4 module
28 — Not used
29 — Not used
30 — Not used
31 15A* Foglamps
32 — Not used
33 30A* Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(solenoids)
34 — Not used
35 — Not used
36 — Not used
37 — Not used
38 7.5A* Trailer tow (right turn)
39 — Not used
40 — Not used
41 15A* HEGOs
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 172 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
172
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 173 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Power Distribution Box
Description
42 7.5A* Trailer tow (left turn)
43 — Not used
44 — Not used
45A — Wiper HI/LO relay
45B — Wiper Park/Run relay
46A — A/C clutch solenoid
46B — Washer pump relay
47 — PCM relay
48A — Fuel pump relay
48B — Fog lamp relay
51 — Not used
52 — Not used
53 — Not used
54 — Not used
55 — Blower relay
56 — Starter relay
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving:
•do not brake heavily.
•gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
•hold the steering wheel firmly.
•slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
WARNING: The use of tire sealants is not recommended and
may damage your tires.
Temporary Emergency Spare Tire Information
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary emergency spare tire.
This tire may be a T-type/mini-spare tire which will have the words
“Temporary Use Only” molded into the tire sidewall or it may be a full
size dissimilar spare tire/wheel that is different in brand, size or
CIMS #53242
com_change_tires.01
itdseq=218
CIMS #754992
com_sparetire-info.ran
itdseq=219
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 173 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
173
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 174 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
appearance from the road tire, which will be identified with a “Caution”
label on the wheel. Both of these spare tires are considered “temporary”.
Replace these temporary emergency spare tires on the vehicle with a tire
of the same size, speed rating and load carrying capacity as the other
road tires as soon as possible.
It is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with
a temporary emergency spare tire. If 4WD operation is necessary, do not
operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above 50
miles (80 km).
When driving with the temporary emergency spare tire do not:
•Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
•Exceed 2000 miles (3200 km)
•Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label
•Tow a trailer
•Use snow chains
•Use more than one temporary emergency spare tire
•Use commercial car washing equipment
•Try to repair the temporary emergency spare tire
Use of a temporary emergency spare tire at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
CIMS #1348491
com_dissimilar-tires
itdseq=220
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 174 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
174
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 175 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Mazda. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
•Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
•Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
•Use commercial car washing equipment
•Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The T-type/mini-spare tire/wheel is a unique dissimilar spare tire/wheel
that is narrower in width than the road tire/wheel and the tire size
molded on the sidewall begins with the letter “T”. T-type/mini-spare
tires/wheels have additional restrictions on use. See T-type/mini-spare
tire information earlier in this section for more information.
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
•Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
•Towing a trailer
•Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
•Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
CIMS #1125281
com_spare-tire.mbs
itdseq=221
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 175 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
175
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 176 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Tool Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack, jack handle, wheel nut
wrench
Regular Cab: behind seats and
underneath the jack and tools
cover
Cab Plus: stowed in the passenger
side rear cab under the plastic tray
inside the storage bin or behind
the jump seat in a separate tool
bag
Cab Plus 4–Door: stowed behind
the front seats, between jump
seats and underneath jack and
tools cover.
Key, spare tire lock (if equipped) In the glove box
Removing the spare tire
1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the
illustrations.
When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following:
•one handle extension and one
typical extension. To assemble,
slide parts together. To
disconnect, depress button and
pull apart.
•one wheel nut wrench. Depress
button and slide together.
art=raner301_a
art=raner302_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 176 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
176
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 177 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
2. If equipped, unlock and remove
the spare tire carrier lock from
the rear access hole located just
above the rear bumper and
below the tailgate.
3. Insert the straight end of the
jack handle into the rear access
hole located just above the rear
bumper and below the tailgate.
Forward motion will stop and
resistance to turning will be felt
when properly engaged.
4. Turn the handle
counterclockwise until tire is
lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack.
5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire.
Stowing the spare tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
2. Install the retainer through the
wheel center and slide the
wheel under the vehicle.
3. Turn the spare handle clockwise
until the tire is raised to its
original position underneath the
vehicle. The spare handle
ratchets when the tire is raised
to the stowed position. It will
not allow you to overtighten.
art=raner303_a
art=unoer300_a
art=unoer303_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 177 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
177
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 178 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4. If your vehicle is equipped with P265/75 R15 AT tires, do not stow a
flat or inflated full size spare tire in the spare tire carrier. The flat
full size tire should be stowed and tied down in the pickup box bed
until it can be repaired.
5. If removed, install the spare tire carrier lock on the access hole
above the bumper.
Tire change procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual
transmission).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and place
gearshift lever in P (Park)
(automatic transmission) or 1
(First) (manual transmission).
2. Set the parking brake and turn
engine OFF.
CIMS #684806
com_change_proc.mbs
itdseq=222
art=unogf300_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 178 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
178
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 179 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. Block the diagonally opposite
wheel.
4. Insert tapered end of the lug
wrench behind hub caps and
twist them off.
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise
but do not remove them until
the wheel is raised off the
ground.
6. Position the jack according to
the following guides and turn
the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch (25
mm) off the ground.
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack
is only meant for changing the tire.
•Front
art=naver301_b
art=viler304_a
art=raner520_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 179 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
179
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 180 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Rear
Never use the differential as a
jacking point. It is too easy for
the vehicle to tilt or fall and you
can be injured.
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts with
the lug wrench.
8. Replace the flat tire with the
spare tire, making sure the valve
stem is facing outward. Reinstall
the lug nuts until the wheel is
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the
wheel has been lowered.
9. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts, in the
order shown. Refer to Wheel
lug nut torque specifications
later in this chapter for the
proper lug nut torque
specification.
11. Stow the flat tire. Refer to
Stowing the spare tire.
12. Stow the jack and lug wrench.
Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.
13. Unblock the wheels.
Stowing the flat/spare tire
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
1
43
25
CIMS #1112962
com_stow-tire.ran
itdseq=223
art=raner521_a
art=mbser300_a
art=viler305_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 180 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
180
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 181 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the wire and
retainer through the center of the wheel.
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you
to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your
earliest convenience.
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen
and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire
may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire
pressure (every six months, per Service Maintenance Section), or
at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other
components.
6. Install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the access hole above
the rear bumper with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack
handle.
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 50–100 miles (80–160
km) after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Lug nut socket
size/Bolt size
Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
Lug nut socket size:
3
⁄
4
” (19 mm) hex
Bolt size:
1
⁄
2
x20
100 135
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.
CIMS #1244586
com_lug-nut-torque.p150
itdseq=224
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 181 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
181
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 182 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake
drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any
fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they
do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,
resulting in loss of control.
Note: If there is corrosion on the area where the wheel contacts the
hub, apply a thin film of grease or anti-seize compound on that area.
OVERHEATING
If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience
power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is
probably too hot.
If this happens:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.
2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual
transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake.
3. Turn off the air conditioner.
WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The
escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY
after steam is no longer escaping from the engine.
4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or
from the engine compartment.
•If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near
the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch
to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling
fans will start to cool the engine.
•If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle
the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop
the engine and let it cool.
5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator
hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and
water pump.
CIMS #1137423
com_overheating-mazdas
itdseq=225
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 182 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
182
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 183 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the
engine and call an authorized dealer.
See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If
you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious,
carefully add coolant as required.
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the
engine and radiator are hot.
Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have
the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged
unless repairs are made.
JUMP STARTING
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could
result in injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other
moving parts.
CIMS #52573 com_jump-start
itdseq=226
CIMS #57613
com_prep-for-jump
itdseq=227
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 183 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
183
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 184 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion
before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight
and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
CIMS #1269598
com_connecting-cables.mbs
itdseq=228
art=coner703_a
art=coner702_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 184 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
184
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 185 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and
the fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers
or the intake manifold as grounding points.
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
CIMS #52575
com_jump_starts
itdseq=229
art=coner701_a
art=coner700_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 185 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
185
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 186 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
CIMS #52576
com_removing-cables
itdseq=230
art=coner700_a
art=coner701_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 186 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
186
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 187 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
art=coner702_a
art=coner703_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 187 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
187
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 188 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
CIMS #1218646
com_tow.no-sling-mbs
itdseq=231
art=winer104_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 188 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Roadside Emergencies
188
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 189 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following
steps:
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the
authorized dealer or the OWNER.
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting
your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North
American Operations by one of the following ways:
Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local
Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.
By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom
of the home page).
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more
efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
CIMS #921592
com_assist-usa
itdseq=232
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 189 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
189
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 190 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda
Distributor.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the
operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are
most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your
dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized
dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If
the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the
owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.
STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer
Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service
Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional
Office nearest you for such arrangements.
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations
Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario
L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification
label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual
for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date.
5. Present odometer reading.
CIMS # com_assist-canada
itdseq=233
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 190 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
190
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 191 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service
Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible
has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases
requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel
and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence
therefore for most effective results.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an
independent third party through binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an
independent third party through binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached
between an owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all
CIMS #1493251
com_mediation-arbit-mazda
itdseq=234
CIMS #921594
com_camvap-mazda
itdseq=235
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 191 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
191
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 192 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services
offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Regional Offices
Regional Offices Areas Covered
Mazda Canada Inc.
Western Region
8171 Ackroyd Road
Suite 2000
Richmond, B.C.
V6X 3K1
(604) 303–5670
Alberta,
British Columbia,
Manitoba,
Saskatchewan,
Yukon
Mazda Canada Inc.
Central Region
305 Milner Avenue
Suite 400
Scarborough, Ontario.
M1B 3V4
1 (800) 263–4680
Ontario
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 192 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
192
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 193 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Regional Offices Areas Covered
Mazda Canada Inc.
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region
6111 Route Trans
Canadienne
Pointe Claire, Quebec
H9R 5A5
(514) 694–6390
Quebec,
New Brunswick,
Nova Scotia,
Prince Edward Island,
Newfoundland
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific
item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an
owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties
cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
CIMS #1493253
com_camvap-mazda2
itdseq=236
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 193 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
193
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 194 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Regional Offices
Regional Offices Areas Covered
Mazda Canada Inc.
Western Region
8171 Ackroyd Road
Suite 2000
Richmond, B.C.
V6X 3K1
(604) 303–5670
Alberta,
British Columbia,
Manitoba,
Saskatchewan,
Yukon
Mazda Canada Inc.
Central Region
55 Vogell Road
Richmond Hill, Ontario.
L4B 3K5
1 (800) 263–4680
Ontario
Mazda Canada Inc.
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region
6111 Route Trans
Canadienne
Pointe Claire, Quebec
H9R 5A5
(514) 694–6390
Quebec,
New Brunswick,
Nova Scotia,
Prince Edward Island,
Newfoundland
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep
your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following
steps:
STEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the
authorized dealer or the OWNER.
CIMS #1493252
com_reg-office-mazda
itdseq=237
CIMS #605763
com_assist-puertorico
itdseq=238
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 194 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
194
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 195 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
STEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please
contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,
Attn: Customer Assistance
Plaza Motors Corp.
Mazda de Puerto Rico
P.O. Box 362722
San Juan, Puerto Rico
00936–2722
Tel: (787) 788–9300
This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.
That is our goal.
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda
Distributor.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
CIMS #1066951
com_lemon-law.mazda
itdseq=239
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 195 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
195
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 196 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or
safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total
of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Mazda North American Operations
7755, Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS
U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)
(Distributor in each area)
CANADA
Mazda Canada, Inc.
55 Vogell Road
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)
(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)
PUERTO RICO
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722
TEL: (787) 788–9300
GUAM
(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam
TEL: (671) 646–9216
CIMS #605764
com_distributors
itdseq=240
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 196 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
196
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 197 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
SAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234–7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
Beach Road
Chalan LauLau
Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 235–4868
AMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699–1854
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA
•New Vehicle Limited Warranty
•Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
•Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
•Federal Emission Control Warranty
– Emission Defect Warranty
– Emission Performance Warranty
•California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)
•Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
•Tire Warranty
NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda
portfolio.
Outside the United States
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles
meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore,
vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in
other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.
CIMS #1493254
com_warranties-mazda2
itdseq=241
CIMS #1493255
com_outside-us-mazda
itdseq=242
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 197 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
197
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 198 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,
Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside
of the United States:
•Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the
emission controls and engine.
•Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement
parts may not be available.
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more
information.
Outside Canada
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for
use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in
the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda
vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the
United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside
of Canada:
•Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the
emission controls and engine.
•Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement
parts may not be available.
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more
information.
CIMS #1493256
com_outside-can-mazda
itdseq=243
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 198 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
198
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 199 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in
stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the
manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine
parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or
safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be
dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could
seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.
This could cause you to have an accident or increase your
chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories.
WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or
choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential
systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag
(SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be
very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical
equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo
systems, and car alarm systems.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may
result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners
who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda
Dealer, refer to the chart below.
If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
CIMS #606351
com_non-genuine-accessories
itdseq=244
CIMS #689691
com_service-pubs.mbs
itdseq=245
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 199 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
199
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 200 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
9999 95 022B 05 WORKSHOP MANUAL
9999 95 020G 05 WIRING DIAGRAM
9999 95 023C 05 OWNER’S MANUAL
WORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive
train, body and chassis.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the
entire electrical system.
OWNER’S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and
operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.
Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained
personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely
maintain Mazda vehicles.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
your Mazda importer/distributor.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, or your Mazda
importer/distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
(Note)
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to:
CIMS #606352
com_report-safe-defects
itdseq=246
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 200 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
200
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 201 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Mazda North American Operations
7755, Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618–2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623–9734
Customer Assistance Center
or toll free at 1 (800) 222–5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda
Distributor. See the Mazda importers/distributors section in this
chapter.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 201 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Customer Assistance
201
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 202 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as an approved shampoo available from your Mazda
authorized dealer.
•Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
•Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
•Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
•It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
•Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
•Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
•Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
WAXING
Applying Mazda Paint Sealant (ZC-45) to your vehicle every six months
will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
•Wash the vehicle first.
•Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use Mazda Premium Liquid
Wax (ZC-53-A), which is available from your authorized dealer, or an
equivalent quality product.
•Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up
paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.
CIMS #1091385
com_ext-wash.mazda
itdseq=247
CIMS #975905
com_exterior-wax-fly
itdseq=248
CIMS #1001622
com_chip-repair.mazfly
itdseq=249
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 202 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Cleaning
202
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 203 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
•Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.
In order to maintain their shine:
•Clean with One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate, which is available
from your authorized Mazda dealer.
•Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
•Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
•To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal, available from your authorized Mazda dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
•Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
•Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water
will damage the engine or other engine components.
•Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, available at your authorized
Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse
clean.
•Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
CIMS #1001623
com_wheel-rim.mazfly
itdseq=250
CIMS #1010871
com_engine-fly.mbs
itdseq=251
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 203 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Cleaning
203
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 204 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•2.3L Engine
•3.0L Engine
2.3L
16 VALVE
art=ranmc723_e
art=ranmc704_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 204 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Cleaning
204
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 205 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•4.0L Engine
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
•For routine cleaning, use One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate,
available at your authorized Mazda dealer.
•If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal, available at your authorized Mazda dealer.
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned
regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree
sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow
these tips:
•The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive
cleaner such as Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available from your
authorized Mazda dealer.
•Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
•Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
CIMS #1001625
com_ext-plastic.mazfly
itdseq=252
CIMS #1001626
com_wiper.mazfly
itdseq=253
art=ranmc708_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 205 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Cleaning
205
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 206 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth, or use Mazda Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
•Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
•Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
•Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry
cloth; you may also use Mazda Dash & Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38-A).
•Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, and safety belts:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•Remove light stains and soil with Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner,
available at your authorized Mazda dealer.
•If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Spot and Stain Remover, available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
•If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
•Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
CIMS #975923
com_inst-panel-fly
itdseq=254
CIMS #975924
com_woodtone-fly
itdseq=255
CIMS #1129642
com_fabric.mazfly-no
itdseq=256
CIMS # com_underbody-fly
itdseq=257
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 206 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Cleaning
206
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 207 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid
specifications. For best results, use these products or products of
equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda
dealer.
CIMS #1001629
com_care-prods.mazfly
itdseq=258
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 207 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Cleaning
207
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 208 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
INTRODUCTION
Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage
to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you
to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably
an authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for
your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been
designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete,
and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to
vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been
performed as prescribed.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as
opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will
not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original
equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it
always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine
Mazda parts.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Schedule 1 — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control
Systems
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the
following conditions apply. If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
•Repeated short-distance driving.
•Driving in dusty conditions.
•Towing a trailer.
•Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
•Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation.
•High-speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle.
•Off-road operation.
NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described
maintenance at the recommended intervals.
CIMS #608142
com_maint-intro.j14
itdseq=259
CIMS #684323
com_maintenance.mbs
itdseq=260
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 208 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
208
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 209 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
CHART SYMBOLS
I: Inspect and if necessary, correct, clean or replace
AAdjust
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances
shown, whichever occurs first.
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
x 1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
(x 1000 km) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
ENGINE
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
PCV valve *3
AIR CLEANER
Air cleaner filter R R
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs *4
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant (yellow) Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 60
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
or 36 months
Coolant condition and protection,
hoses and clamps — annually —
prior to cold weather every 12
months
III I
CHASSIS AND BODY
Wheel lug nut torque *1 I IIIIIIIIII I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X
= recommended interval for optimal
tire life)
IXIXXIXXIXX I
Clutch reservoir fluid level I I IIII
Front wheel bearings (4x2) L
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 209 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
209
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 210 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
x 1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
(x 1000 km) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Disc brake system I I I I
Caliper slide rails L L L L
Drum brake system, lines and hoses I I I I
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,
looseness
II
Manual transmission fluid R
Automatic
transmission fluid
*2 I I
Exhaust system shielding (for
trapped material)
II
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped
with grease fittings)
LLLLLL
Parking brake system (for damage
and operation)
III I
Ball joints (4x2) I/L I/L I/L I/L
Transfer case fluid (4x4) Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Rear axle lubricant Does not require replacement unless rear axle
submerged in water
Accessory drive belts
Fuel filter *5 R R
Steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension and driveshaft
III I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and
gap specifications.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 210 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
210
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 211 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
Schedule 1 continued
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96
x 1000 miles 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
(x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192)
ENGINE
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
PCV valve *3
AIR CLEANER
Air cleaner filter R R
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs *4 R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant (yellow) Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 60
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)
or 36 months
Coolant condition and protection,
hoses and clamps — annually —prior
to cold weather every 12 months
III I
CHASSIS AND BODY
Wheel lug nut torque *1 I IIIIIIIIII I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X
= recommended interval for optimal
tire life)
XXIXXIXXIXX I
Clutch reservoir fluid level I I IIII
Front wheel bearings (4x2) L
Disc brake system I I I I
Caliper slide rails L L L L
Drum brake system, lines and hoses I I I I
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 211 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
211
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 212 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Maintenance Item
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),
whichever comes first)
Months 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96
x 1000 miles 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
(x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192)
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,
looseness
II
Manual transmission fluid R
Automatic
transmission fluid
*2 I I
Exhaust system shielding (for
trapped material)
II
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped
with grease fittings)
LLLLLL
Parking brake system (for damage
and operation)
III I
Ball joints (4x2) I/L I/L I/L I/L
Transfer case fluid (4x4) Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
Rear axle lubricant Does not require replacement unless rear axle
submerged in water
Accessory drive belts I
Fuel filter *5 R R
Steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension and driveshaft
III I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and
gap specifications.
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 212 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
212
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 213 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
SCHEDULE 2 — SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If your driving habits FREQUENTLY include one or more of the
following conditions:
•Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures
remain below freezing.
•Towing a trailer, or carrying maximum loads.
•Operating in severe dust conditions.
•Operating during hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
•Extensive idling, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery service.
•High speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle (max. GVW).
•Off-road operation
Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles
(4,800 km) whichever occurs first.
NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more
hours of use on your vehicle than is actually indicated by the mileage
odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading
when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. If
you are using your vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain
stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door-to-door
delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then
Mazda recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes
to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS or use. Since most
vehicles are not equipped with hour-meters, it may be necessary for you
to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 213 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
213
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 214 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Special Operating
Conditions
Replace Engine Oil and Filter
Inspect Brake System
Replace Fuel Filter
Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
Replace Spark Plugs
Replace Engine Air Filter
Change Manual Transmission Fluid
Inspect and Lubricate U-Joints
Lubricate Front Wheel Bearing (4x2)
Change Transfer Case Fluid (4x4)
Suggested Maintenance
Interval
3,000
miles or
3 months
5,000
miles 15,000
miles 30,000
miles 60,000
miles As
required As
required As
required 30,000
miles 60,000
miles
Towing a trailer or
using a camper or
car top carrier
XXXX
Extensive idling or
low-speed driving
for long distances
as in heavy
commercial use
such as delivery,
taxi or patrol car
X XXXX XX
Operating in dusty
conditions such as
unpaved or dusty
roads
XXX X
Off road operation X X X
For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or
qualified service professional.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Owner Maintenance Schedule
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle
inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable
operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or
qualified service technician as soon as possible.
While operating your vehicle
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 214 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
214
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 215 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell or exhaust
fumes in the vehicle.
•Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased
steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the
straight ahead position.
•Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on a smooth, level road.
•When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard to push” brake pedal.
•If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occur,
check the transmission fluid level.
•Check automatic transmission Park function.
•Check parking brake.
At least monthly
•Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
•Check tires for wear and proper air pressure.
•Check engine oil level.
•Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.
•Check washer fluid level.
At least twice a year (for example, every spring and fall)
•Check power steering fluid level.
•Check clutch fluid level (if equipped).
•Check and clean body and door drain holes.
•Check and lubricate all hinges, latches, and outside locks.
•Check and lubricate door rubber weather strips.
•Check parking brake for proper operation.
•Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function.
•Check air pressure in spare tire.
•Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
•Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, safety belt) for
operation.
•Check cooling system fluid level and verify coolant specific gravity is
correct for summer or winter conditions.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 215 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
215
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 216 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Check battery water level (non-maintenance free).
•Check battery connections and clean if necessary.
Retightening lug nuts
•Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
•Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels
and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
•We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
•We provide service maintenance section which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information”
to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built
to provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
•Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
•Manual transmission:
CIMS #604851
com_ser_rec.j14
itdseq=261
CIMS #83506
com_precautions_servicing.04
itdseq=262
CIMS #83508
com_working_off.05
itdseq=263
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 216 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
216
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 217 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1
(First).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the engine on
•Automatic transmission:
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
•Manual transmission:
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in
N (Neutral).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under
the bottom of the instrument
panel near the steering column.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle
and release the auxiliary latch
that is located under the front
center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood and support it
with the prop rod.
CIMS #83511
com_working_on.05
itdseq=264
CIMS #555081 com_hood-title
itdseq=265
CIMS #80404
com_hood_open.03
itdseq=266
art=unogf302_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 217 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
217
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 218 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.3L I4 engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
5. Engine oil filler cap
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
9. Battery
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Air filter assembly
CIMS #71972
com_engine-comp
itdseq=267
CIMS #528617 com_2.3L-rwd
itdseq=268
art=ranmc141_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 218 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
218
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 219 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
3.0L V6 engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Power distribution box
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
9. Battery
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Air filter assembly
CIMS #689982
com_3.0L-rwd.mbs
itdseq=269
art=ranmc115_g
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 219 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
219
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 220 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4.0L SOHC V6 engine
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Power distribution box
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)
8. Battery
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Air filter assembly
11. Engine coolant reservoir
CIMS #713068
com_4.0L-sohc.mbs
itdseq=270
art=expmc101_m
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 220 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
220
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 221 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Mazda specification . Do not use any
special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug
wash. They may cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing.
Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40° F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.
W
A
S
H
E
R
F
L
U
I
D
O
N
L
Y
RADIATOR
COOLANT
ONLY
CIMS #232781
com_windshield_fluid
itdseq=271
CIMS #918793
com_wash_fluid.mbs
itdseq=272
CIMS #1123866
com_check_wipers.mbs
itdseq=273
art=ranmc301_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 221 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
221
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 222 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from
the vehicle. Turn the blade at an
angle from the wiper arm. Push
the lock pin manually to release
the blade and pull the wiper
blade down toward the
windshield to remove it from
the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into
place until a click is heard.
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the service maintenance section for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into
the oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual
transmission).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
CIMS #959871
com_chnge_blades.fly
itdseq=274
CIMS #52549 com_oil
itdseq=275
CIMS #1127536
com_chk-oil.maztrk
itdseq=276
art=dnomc009_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 222 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
222
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 223 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•2.3L I4 engine
•3.0L V6 engine
MAXMIN
art=ranmc135_d
art=ranmc137_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 223 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
223
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 224 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•4.0L SOHC V6 engine
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
•If the oil level is between the two holes or between the MIN and
MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable,
DO NOT ADD OIL.
•If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough
oil to raise the level between the two holes or between the MIN-MAX
range.
•2.3L I4 engine
SAE 5W-20
art=ranmc139_c
art=ranmc136_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 224 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
224
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 225 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•3.0L V6 engine
SAE 5W-20
•4.0L SOHC V6 engine
SAE 5W-30
•Oil levels above the MAX mark or upper hole may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
art=ranmc122_b
art=207mc008_c
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 225 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
225
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 226 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only
certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine
oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is within the
normal range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap 1/4 turn
until it stops.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine Oil Recommendations
2.3L & 3.0L Engines
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent oil Mazda specification.
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
CIMS #1286226
com_add-oil.qtr-turn
itdseq=277
CIMS #689983
com_oil-rec.5w20.mbs
itdseq=278
art=expii004_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 226 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
226
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 227 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the service maintenance section.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
4.0L Engine
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent Mazda Specification.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in
the service maintenance section.
Engine Oil Filter Recommendation
Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed
in the service maintenance section. Mazda production and aftermarket
(Mazda) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life.
If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Mazda Material and
design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be
experienced.
art=expii004_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 227 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
227
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 228 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter (or another
brand meeting Mazda specifications) for your engine.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Mazda maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Service Maintenance Section for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If possible, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the
battery needs water often, have the charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
CIMS #918794
com_battery.mbs
itdseq=279
art=ranmc105_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 228 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
228
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 229 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,
sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When
working near the battery, always shield your face and protect
your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If
acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start
the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
•The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim
strategy.
CIMS #72063 com_relearn.03
itdseq=280
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 229 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
229
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 230 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its
optimum shift feel.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
•Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture
of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant, or an equivalent
premium engine coolant that meets Mazda specification.
A50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant
provides:
•maximum cooling system efficiency.
•freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
•boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
•protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
•an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant
gauge.
The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level
and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
CIMS #510581 com_cool.title
itdseq=281
CIMS #689984
com_check-add-cool.mbs
itdseq=282
art=dewmc111_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 230 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
230
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 231 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to
the engine and cooling system may result.
•2.3L engine
art=ranmc146_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 231 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
231
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 232 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•3.0L & 4.0L engines
When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
•The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
•Confirm the color and type of engine coolant before adding, to avoid
mixing incompatible products.
•Refer to the service maintenance section for service interval
schedules.
•Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not
use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid
outside of its specified function and vehicle location.
art=ranmc108_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 232 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
232
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 233 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Adding engine coolant
Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine
coolant that meets a Mazda specification.
•DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).
•DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLtengine coolant or an equivalent
engine coolant.
•DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.
•DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.
•DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.
•DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system.
•The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant
your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield,
it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool , until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
•NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
•NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
•Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of
emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
CIMS #691521
com_adding-coolant.mbs
itdseq=283
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 233 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
233
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 234 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
Note: The 3.0L and 4.0L V6 engines use the overflow system, and the
2.3L I4 engines use the degas system.
WARNING: To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being
released from the engine cooling system, never remove the
reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to
follow this warning may result in damage to the engine’s cooling
system and possible severe personal injury.
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly
turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD”
level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow
system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is
almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking engine coolant . If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 234 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
234
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 235 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine
damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Mazda
specification. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet
Mazda specifications may harm engine and cooling system components.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and
disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):
•It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
•NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
•Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
•Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
•NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
•Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
CIMS #691523
com_recycled-coolant.mbs
itdseq=284
CIMS #52568
com_refill-capacity
itdseq=285
CIMS #455269
com_extreme.climates
itdseq=286
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 235 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
235
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 236 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
•Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
FUEL FILTER
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to service
maintenance section for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel
filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the
fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision,
which may result in possible personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
CIMS #246409 com_fuel.filter
itdseq=287
CIMS #52343 com_fueling
itdseq=288
CIMS #1512892
com_fuel-prec.mbs
itdseq=289
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 236 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
236
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 237 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
•Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
•Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling
excess fumes.
art=f12mc032_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 237 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
237
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 238 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on
the ground.
•DO NOT fill a fuel container while
it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area/pickup bed).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
•DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to remove
it.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.
“Check Fuel Cap” illuminates when the ignition is turned to the ON
position to ensure your bulb is working. When this light turns on, check
the fuel filler cap. Continuing to operate the vehicle with the Check Fuel
Cap light on, can activate the Service Engine Soon warning. When the
fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a
period of normal driving. It may take a long period of time for the
system to detect an improperly installed fuel filler cap.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The warranty may be void
CIMS #918851
com_fuel.cap.ckfuelcap.mbs
itdseq=290
art=mbsmc001_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 238 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
238
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 239 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct
genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,
excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the
fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision,
which may result in possible personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Cleaner air
Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
CIMS #52352
com_choosing-fuel
itdseq=291
CIMS #52358 com_clean-air
itdseq=292
CIMS #52354
com_octane-recommend.01
itdseq=293
art=f12mc033_b
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 239 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
239
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 240 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized
dealer.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
•The indicator may come on. For more information on the “Check
Engine” indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster chapter.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are
CIMS #52356
com_fuel-quality
itdseq=294
CIMS #459922
com_no-fuel.ce-iso
itdseq=295
CIMS #212622
com_essentials-fuel.title
itdseq=296
CIMS #713069
com_measuring-tecniks.mbs
itdseq=297
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 240 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
240
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 241 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
•Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
•Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.
•Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
•Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
•Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
•Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
CIMS #212766
com_filling-the-tank
itdseq=298
CIMS #212767
com_calculating-fuel-economy
itdseq=299
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 241 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
241
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 242 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
•Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
•Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
•Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
•Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
•Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
•Slow down gradually.
•Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
•Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
•Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
•You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between fourth and fifth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
•Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
•Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
CIMS #212768
com_driving-style.title
itdseq=300
CIMS #1280386
com_habits.maz
itdseq=301
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 242 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
242
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 243 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
•Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
•Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
•Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
•Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in service maintenance section.
Conditions
•Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
•Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
•Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
•Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
•Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
•Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
•Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
•Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
•Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy
comparisons with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
CIMS #212770
com_drvg-style_maintenance
itdseq=302
CIMS #212936
com_conditions
itdseq=303
CIMS #212938
com_epa-sticker
itdseq=304
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 243 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
243
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 244 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
•Have the items listed in service maintenance section performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in service maintenance section
are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for service of components affecting emission control,
such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in
performance and durability.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the indicator, charging system warning light or the
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not
working properly.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
CIMS #1221316
com_emis-ses.maztrk
itdseq=305
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 244 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
244
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 245 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission
warranty information.
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause your indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler
cap in this chapter.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the indicator should turn off—A driving cycle consists of a
cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional
vehicle service is required.
If the indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your indicator is on, refer to
the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with
the indicator on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
CIMS #1200842
com_onboard-OBDII
itdseq=306
CIMS #460104
com_ready-test.iso
itdseq=307
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 245 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
245
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 246 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
•First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
•Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
POWER STEERING FLUID
•2.3L I4 engine
•3.0L V6 engine
CIMS #76037
com_check-steering-fluid.04
itdseq=308
art=ranmc143_a
art=expmc500_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 246 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
246
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 247 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
•4.0L V6 engine
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the service maintenance section
for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only
MERCONtATF.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. If your vehicle is equipped with a 3.0L V6 engine, check the
fluid level on the dipstick. It should be within the FULL HOT range.
Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.
5. If your vehicle is equipped with a 4.0L SOHC V6 or 2.3L I4
engine, check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between
the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this
range.
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the FULL HOT range. Be sure to put the
dipstick back in the reservoir.
D
O
N
O
T
O
V
E
R
F
I
L
L
P
O
W
E
R
S
T
E
E
R
I
N
G
F
L
U
I
D
art=expmc501_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 247 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
247
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 248 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
BRAKE FLUID
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line
that do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek
service from your authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the
eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink
water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
WARNING: If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will
cause permanent damage to your brakes.
WARNING: Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run
dry. This may cause the brakes to fail.
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Check the fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance information
for the service interval schedules.
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step
in the reservoir.
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Mazda specification.
Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter.
MAX
CIMS #1127051
com_brake_title
itdseq=309
CIMS #1265242
com_brake-max.maz
itdseq=310
CIMS #918853
com_clutch.truck.mbs
itdseq=311
art=unomc300_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 248 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
248
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 249 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the
eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek
medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink
water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt and
water from entering the
reservoir.
2. Remove cap and rubber
diaphragm from reservoir.
3. Add fluid until the level reaches
the step in the reservoir.
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and
cap onto reservoir.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
•Refer to service maintenance section for scheduled check and
change intervals.
•Transmission does not consume fluid.
•Check fluid when transmission is not operating properly or if you see
a leak.
•Fluid level must be checked at normal operating temperature, 20 miles
(30 km) of driving.
To check and add fluid:
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) to reach normal operating
temperatures.
2. If driven in hot weather, city traffic, pulling a trailer, allow
transmission to cool for 30 minutes before checking.
3. Engage parking brake, start engine.
4. Put your foot on the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever slowly
through all of the gear ranges.
5. Shift to P (Park) and leave the engine running.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean with a dry lint free rag.
7. Install and fully seat the dipstick into the filler tube.
CIMS #80235
com_transmission-fluid
itdseq=312
CIMS #953918
com_check_autotran.fly
itdseq=313
art=ranmc153_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 249 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
249
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 250 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
8. Remove the dipstick and inspect
the fluid level. Level should be
in the cross-hatched area.
9. If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250ml) increments through the
filler tube until the level is correct at normal operating temperatures.
Refer to the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter for the
correct fluid type. The use of any other non-approved fluid may
cause internal transmission damage.
10. Fluid can be checked at ambient
temperatures between 50–95°F
(10–30°C). DO NOT ADD fluid
until the transmission is at
normal operating temperatures or the transmission will be overfilled.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at or below the bottom of
the dipstick.
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may cause overheating, shift and/or
engagement concerns and internal
transmission damage. If an overfill
condition occurs, excess fluid should
be removed by an authorized dealer.
CIMS #953919
com_trans-level.fly
itdseq=314
art=ranmc130_a
art=ranmc131_a
art=ranmc129_b
art=ranmc132_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 250 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
250
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 251 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Assure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
CIMS #1126961
com_chk-man-trans.maz
itdseq=315
art=mbsmc002_a
art=f23mc115_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 251 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
251
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 252 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Assure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal
joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
CIMS #918861
com_check-add-tcase.mbs
itdseq=316
CIMS #918862
com_serv-shaft-yoke.mbs
itdseq=317
art=ranmc128_b
art=f12mc022_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 252 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
252
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 253 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
CHECKING AND ADDING REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
1. Park the vehicle on a level
surface.
2. Engage the parking brake fully –
put in first gear.
3. Assure the vehicle cannot move.
4. Clean the filler plug.
5. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
6. Fluid level should be at the
bottom of the opening.
7. Add enough fluid through the
filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
8. Install and tighten the fill plug
securely.
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to Lubricant
Specifications in this chapter.
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid Mazda Part
Name
Application Capacity
Engine oil
(includes filter
change)
Mazda SAE 5W-
20 Premium
Motor Oil
2.3L engine 4.0 quarts
(3.8L)
3.0L V6 engines 4.5 quarts
(4.3L)
Mazda SAE 5W-
30 Premium
Motor Oil
4.0L V6 engine 5.0 quarts
(4.7L)
Brake fluid DOT 3 Brake
Fluid
All Fill to line on
reservoir
6
CIMS #685182 com_refill.mbs
itdseq=318
art=mbsmc003_a
art=f12mc022_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 253 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
253
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 254 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fluid Mazda Part
Name
Application Capacity
Power steering
fluid
Mazda
MERCONtATF
All Fill to range on
dipstick
Transmission
fluid
1
Mazda
MERCONtATF
5-speed manual 2.8 quarts
(2.65L)
2
Mazda
MERCONtV
ATF
4x2 vehicles
with automatic
and 2.3L I4
engine
9.9 quarts
(9.4L)
3
4x2 vehicles
with automatic
and 3.0L or 4.0L
engines
10.0 quarts
(9.5L)
3
4x4 vehicles
with automatic
and 3.0L or 4.0L
10.3 quarts
(9.8L)
3
Engine coolant
4
Premium Engine
Coolant
2.3 L I4 engine
with manual
transmission
10.5 quarts
(10.0L)
2.3L I4 engine
with automatic
transmission
10.2 quarts
(9.7L)
3.0L V6 engine
with manual
transmission
15.1 quarts
(14.3L)
3.0L V6 engine
with automatic
transmission
14.8 quarts
(14.0L)
4.0L V6 engine
with manual
transmission
13.7 quarts
(13.0L)
4.0L V6 engine
with automatic
transmission
13.2 quarts
(12.5L)
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 254 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
254
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 255 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Fluid Mazda Part
Name
Application Capacity
Fuel tank N/A Regular cab
(Short wheel
base)
17 gallons
(64.4L)
SuperCab 19.5 gallons
(73.8L)
Transfer Case
Fluid
Mazda
MERCONtATF
4x4 Vehicles 1.25 quarts
(1.2L)
Front axle
lubricant
Mazda SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
4x4 Vehicles 3.6 pints (1.7L)
Rear axle
lubricant
5
Mazda SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
All 5.0-5.3 pints
(2.4-2.5L)
Windshield
washer fluid
Ultra-Clear
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
All 2.75 quarts
(2.6L)
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. MERCONtand MERCONtV are not interchangeable. DO NOT
mix MERCONtand MERCONtV. Refer to the service maintenance
section to determine the correct service interval.
2
Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the
bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
3
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may
vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The
amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the
indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.
4
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. DO NOT MIX
different colors or types of coolant. DO NOT USE Mazda Extended Life
Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine coolant, in
this chapter.
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 255 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
255
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 256 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
5
Traction-Lok axles use 4.75–5.0 pints (2.2–2.4L) of rear axle lubricant.
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier meeting Mazda
specifications for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. Service refill
capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6
mm to 14 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole.
6
Brake fluid will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels below the MAX line that do
not trigger the brake warning light are within the normal operating
range, there is no need to add fluid. If the levels are outside the normal
operating range, the performance of your brake system could be
compromised, seek service from your local authorized dealer
immediately.
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item Mazda part name or equivalent
Front axle (4X4) SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
Rear axle SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle
Lubricant
1
Brake fluid and clutch fluid (if
equipped)
High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid
4
Door weather strips Silicone Lubricant
Engine coolant Mazda Premium Engine Coolant
3
Engine oil 2.3L I4 and 3.0L V6
engines
SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil
Engine oil 4.0L V6 engines SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil
Hinges, door checks, latches,
striker plates, fuel filler door hinge
and seat tracks
Multi-Purpose Grease
Transmission /steering/parking
brake linkages and pivots, brake
and clutch pedal shaft, clutch pilot
bearing and input shaft spline
(manual transmission)
Premium Long-Life Grease
CIMS #75473 com_lubes.all
itdseq=319
CIMS #691524
com_lubes.mbs
itdseq=320
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 256 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
256
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 257 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Item Mazda part name or equivalent
Power steering fluid, transfer case
fluid (4X4) and transmission fluid
(manual)
MERCONtATF
Automatic transmission (5R44E
and 5R55E)
MERCONtVATF
2
Windshield washer fluid Ultra-clear Windshield Washer
Concentrate
1
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier meeting Mazda
specifications for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles. If submerged in
water, the rear axle lubricant should be changed.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. MERCONtand MERCONtV are not interchangeable. DO NOT
mix MERCONtand MERCONtV. Refer to your service maintenance
section to determine the correct service interval.
3
Do not mix different types or colors of engine coolant.
4
Brake fluid will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when
brake components are replaced. Fluid levels below the MAX line that do
not trigger the brake warning light are within the normal operating
range, there is no need to add fluid. If the levels are outside the normal
operating range, the performance of your brake system could be
compromised, seek service from your authorized dealer immediately.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 2.3L I4 engine 3.0L V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine
Cubic inches 138 182 245
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-2-5-3-6
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch
(1.25–1.35mm)
0.051–0.057 inch
(1.29–1.45mm)
0.052–0.056 inch
(1.32–1.42mm)
Ignition system EDIS EDIS EDIS
Compression
ratio
9.7:1 9.6:1 9.7:1
CIMS #716286
com_data.mazda
itdseq=321
CIMS #685183 com_data.mbs
itdseq=322
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 257 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
257
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 258 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Vehicle dimensions Regular Cab -
inches (mm)
SuperCab -
inches (mm)
(1) Overall length 188.5 (4788) 202.6 (5147)
(2) Overall width 69.4 (1762) 70.3 (1785)
(3) Overall height – 4x2/4x4 65.0 (1652) /
68.5 (1740)
66.0 (1676) /
68.7 (1746)
(4) Wheelbase 111.4 (2831) 125.7 (3192)
(5) Track - Front 58.5 (1486) 58.5 (1486)
(5) Track - Rear 57.3 (1455) 57.3 (1455)
2
5
3
CIMS #686817
com_vehicle_dimen.mbs
itdseq=323
art=ranmc705_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 258 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
258
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 259 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Compliance Certification Label
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label is located on the
structure by the trailing edge of the driver’s door or the edge of the
driver’s door.
1
4
1
4
CIMS #52653
com_vehicle-info.01
itdseq=324
CIMS #606356
com_vinplate.j14
itdseq=325
art=ranmc706_a
art=ranmc707_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 259 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
259
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 260 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CIMS #72686
com_vin-numbers.02
itdseq=326
CIMS #734836
com_vin-info.all
itdseq=327
art=navmc710_a
art=204mc036_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 260 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
260
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 261 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS
You can find a
transmission/transaxle code on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label . The following table tells you
which transmission or transaxle
each code represents.
Code Description
D Five-speed automatic (5R44E/5R55E)
R Five-speed manual (R1)
CIMS #1466141
com_trans-code.all
itdseq=328
CIMS #1498292
com_trans-code.mbs
itdseq=329
art=dnomc047_a
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 261 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Maintenance and Specifications
261
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 262 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
CELL PHONES
Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:
WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a
number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s
hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be
distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is
unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area
before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this
warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands
free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other
electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead,
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using
cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased
concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump
environment.
CIMS #913856
com_cell_phone-mazda
itdseq=330
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 262 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Accessories
262
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 263 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................145
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................77
and child safety seats ..............80
description ................................77
disposal ......................................83
driver airbag ..............................81
indicator light ...........................83
operation ...................................81
passenger airbag .......................81
passenger deactivation switch .84
Ambulance packages ....................7
Antifreeze (see Engine
coolant) .....................................230
Anti-lock brake system (see
Brakes) ..............................145–146
Audio system
6-CD in dash .............................24
Single CD ..................................21
Audio system (see Radio) ..19, 21,
24, 28
Automatic transmission ............149
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................151
fluid, refill capacities ..............253
fluid, specification ..................257
Auxiliary power point .................48
Axle
lubricant specifications ..256–257
refill capacities ........................253
traction lok ..............................148
B
Battery .......................................228
acid, treating emergencies .....228
jumping a disabled battery ....183
maintenance-free ....................228
servicing ..................................228
Bed extender ..............................54
BeltMinder ...................................72
Brakes ........................................145
anti-lock ...........................145–146
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................146
fluid, checking and adding ....248
fluid, refill capacities ..............253
fluid, specifications .........256–257
lubricant specifications ..256–257
parking ....................................147
shift interlock ..........................149
Break-in period .............................5
Bulbs ............................................40
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....253
Cassette tape player ...................24
Cell phone warning ...................262
Changing a tire .........................173
Child safety restraints ................90
child safety belts ......................90
Child safety seats ........................94
attaching with tether straps ....98
in front seat ..............................95
in rear seat ................................95
LATCH .....................................101
tether anchorage hardware .....98
Chimes (warning) .......................16
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............203
instrument panel ....................206
interior .....................................206
interior trim ............................206
Mazda car care products .......207
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 263 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Index
263
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 264 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
plastic parts ............................205
washing ....................................202
waxing .....................................202
wheels ......................................203
wiper blades ............................205
Clock adjust
AM/FM Stereo ...........................19
AM/FM stereo CD .....................21
AM/FM stereo tape/CD/MP3 ....24
Premium AM/FM stereo
CD6/MP3 ...................................28
Single CD ..................................21
Clutch
fluid ..........................................248
operation while driving ..........153
recommended shift speeds ....153
Console ........................................48
Coolant
checking and adding ..............230
refill capacities ................235, 253
specifications ..................256–257
Cruise control (see Speed
control) ........................................50
Customer Assistance .......189–190,
194
D
Daytime running lamps (see
Lamps) .........................................36
Dipstick
engine oil .................................222
Doors
lubricant specifications ..........256
Driveline universal joint and
slip yoke ....................................252
Driving under special
conditions ..................155, 158, 160
mud ..........................................159
sand .........................................159
snow and ice ...........................160
through water .................159, 161
E
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................183
Emergency Flashers .................162
Emission control system ..........244
Engine ........................................258
cleaning ...................................203
coolant .....................................230
idle speed control ...................228
lubrication specifications 256–257
refill capacities ........................253
service points ..................218–220
starting after a collision .........162
Engine block heater .................145
Engine oil ..................................222
checking and adding ..............222
dipstick ....................................222
filter, specifications ................226
recommendations ...................226
refill capacities ........................253
specifications ..................256–257
Exhaust fumes ..........................144
F
Fluid capacities .........................253
Foglamps .....................................37
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......155
driving off road .......................157
electronic shift ........................156
indicator light .........................155
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................148
Fuel ............................................236
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 264 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Index
264
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 265 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
calculating fuel economy .......240
cap ...........................................238
capacity ...................................253
choosing the right fuel ...........239
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................243
detergent in fuel .....................239
filling your vehicle with fuel .236,
238, 241
filter, specifications ................236
fuel pump shut-off switch .....162
improving fuel economy ........240
octane rating ...................239, 258
quality ......................................240
running out of fuel .................240
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................236
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......162
Fuses ..................................163–164
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............238
Gas mileage (see Fuel
economy) ...................................240
Gauges .........................................16
H
Hazard flashers .........................162
Headlamps ...................................36
aiming ........................................37
bulb specifications ....................40
daytime running lights .............36
flash to pass ..............................36
high beam .................................36
replacing bulbs .........................41
turning on and off ....................36
Heating
heating and air conditioning
system .................................33–34
Hood ..........................................217
I
Ignition ...............................141, 258
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..94
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................245
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................206
cluster ........................................12
lighting up panel and interior .37
location of components ............12
J
Jack ............................................173
positioning ...............................173
storage .....................173, 175–177
Jump-starting your vehicle ......183
K
Keys
positions of the ignition .........141
L
Lamps
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................40
daytime running light ...............36
fog lamps ...................................37
headlamps .................................36
headlamps, flash to pass ..........36
instrument panel, dimming .....37
interior lamps .....................40–41
replacing bulbs .......40–41, 43–46
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 265 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Index
265
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 266 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Lane change indicator (see
Turn signal) .................................39
LATCH anchors .........................101
Lights, warning and indicator ....12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........146
Load limits .................................122
Loading instructions .................129
Lubricant specifications ...256–257
Lug nuts ....................................181
Lumbar support, seats ...............64
M
Manual transmission .................153
fluid capacities ........................253
lubricant specifications ..........257
reverse .....................................154
Mirrors .........................................50
fold away ...................................50
side view mirrors (power) .......50
Motorcraft parts ........................236
O
Octane rating ............................239
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................222
Overdrive .....................................53
Overheating ...............................182
P
Parking brake ............................147
Power distribution box (see
Fuses) ........................................167
Power door locks ........................56
Power mirrors .............................50
Power point .................................48
Power steering ..........................148
fluid, checking and adding ....246
fluid, refill capacity ................253
fluid, specifications .........256–257
Power Windows ...........................49
Preparing to drive your vehicle 148
R
Radio ..........................19, 21, 24, 28
Single CD ..................................21
Relays ........................................163
Remote entry system .................57
illuminated entry ......................59
locking/unlocking doors .....56–57
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............76
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ........................65, 67–70
Safety restraints ..............65, 67–70
belt minder ...............................72
extension assembly ..................71
for adults .............................67–69
for children .........................89–90
safety belt maintenance ...........76
warning light and chime ..........72
Safety restraints - LATCH
anchors ......................................101
Safety restraints - tether
anchors ........................................98
Safety seats for children ............94
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................259
Seat belts (see Safety
restraints) ....................................65
Seats ............................................63
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 266 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Index
266
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 267 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
child safety seats ......................94
Servicing your vehicle ..............216
Setting the clock
AM/FM stereo ...........................19
AM/FM stereo CD .....................21
AM/FM stereo tape/CD/MP3 ....24
Premium AM/FM stereo
CD6/MP3 ...................................28
Snowplowing .................................7
Spark plugs, specifications .......258
Special notice
ambulance conversions ..............7
utility-type vehicles ....................6
Specification chart, lubricants 256–257
Speed control ..............................50
Starting your vehicle .......141–142,
144
jump starting ..........................183
Steering wheel
tilting .........................................47
Stereo
Single CD ..................................21
T
Tether anchors ............................98
Tilt steering wheel ......................47
Tires ...........................107–108, 173
alignment ................................114
care ..........................................112
changing ..........................173, 178
checking the pressure ............110
inspecting and inflating .........109
label .........................................121
replacing ..................................116
rotating ....................................114
safety practices .......................113
sidewall information ...............117
snow tires and chains ............121
spare tire .........................173–174
terminology .............................108
tire grades ...............................108
treadwear ........................107, 112
Towing .......................................129
recreational towing .................139
trailer towing ..........................129
wrecker ....................................188
Traction-lok rear axle ...............148
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................252
Transmission
automatic operation ...............149
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....149
fluid, checking and adding
(manual) .................................251
fluid, refill capacities ..............253
lubricant specifications ..256–257
manual operation ....................153
Turn signal ..................................39
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................258
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................260
Vehicle loading ..........................122
camper bodies ........................140
Ventilating your vehicle ...........145
W
Warning chimes ...........................16
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12
Washer fluid ..............................221
Water, Driving through .............161
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 267 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Index
267
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 268 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Tue Apr 12 14:52:56 2005
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/mpdiff
Windows
power .........................................49
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................47
checking and adding fluid .....221
checking and cleaning ............221
replacing wiper blades ...........222
Wrecker towing .........................188
DIFF-MARKED Review Copy ——
(OLD=2005 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2nd Printing (#24721) (Nov-24-2004 11:18:53))
(NEW=2006 B-Series fus Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) 2006 MBS CNE (#NoEntry) (Apr-12-2005 14:48:18))
2006 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),Market: USA (fus)
PAGE: 268 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3DATE: APR 12 2005 at 14:52
JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_mpdiff
Index
268
